denali owner's manual - owner center home€¦ · · 2018-03-282 introduction introduction...

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

2k16_CS6_GMC_Sierra_Den_23133521A.ai 1 9/4/2015 1:58:14 PM2k16_CS6_GMC_Sierra_Den_23133521A.ai 1 9/4/2015 1:58:14 PM

GMC Sierra Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-9234761) - 2016 - crc - 7/24/15

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 25

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . 98

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 156

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 163

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 345

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 363

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 373

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, SIERRA, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCDivision wherever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

If the vehicle has the Duramax®

diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

If the vehicle has the bi-fuel engine,see the Silverado/Sierra Bi-Fuelsupplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23133521 A First Printing ©2015 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the ownermanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses


4 Introduction

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . 12Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 12Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Passenger Sensing System . . . 13Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 14Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 16Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 19Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . 20Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 20Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Universal Remote System . . . . . 21Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 23Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 23E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 7

1. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 152.

2. Integrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) System (If Equipped).See Towing Equipment 0 237.

3. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 146.

Fog Lamps 0 151 (IfEquipped).

4. Air Vents 0 160.

5. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 150.

Windshield Wiper/Washer0 100.

6. Favorite Switches (Out ofView). See Steering WheelControls 0 99.

Volume Switches (Out of View).See Steering Wheel Controls0 99.

7. Instrument Cluster 0 106.

8. Hazard Warning Flashers0 150

9. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 193.

Tow/Haul Selector Button (IfEquipped). See Tow/HaulMode 0 199.

Range Selection Mode (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode0 196.

10. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 149.

11. Infotainment 0 156.

12. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 52 (If Equipped).

13. Power Outlet (AlternatingCurrent) (If Equipped). SeePower Outlets 0 102.

14. Power Outlets 0 102.

15. USB Port. See Infotainment0 156.

16. g Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 208.

0 Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal0 184.

{ Cargo Lamp 0 152.

X Parking Assist Button (IfEquipped). See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing0 215.

A Lane Keep Assist (LKA)(1500 Series) 0 221 (IfEquipped).

5 Hill Descent Control Switch(If Equipped). See Hill DescentControl (HDC) 0 210.

q Exhaust Brake (IfEquipped). See “ExhaustBrake” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Auxiliary Button (If Equipped).See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 247.

17. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 157.

18. Steering Wheel Controls 0 99(If Equipped).

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 123.

19. Hood Release. See Hood0 254.


8 In Brief

20. Horn 0 100.

21. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 99 (Out of View).

22. Cruise Control 0 211.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 218 (If Equipped).

23. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 115.

24. Parking Brake 0 207.

25. Electronic Transfer CaseControl (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive 0 200.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter functions maywork from up to 60 m (197 ft) awayfrom the vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors andthe tailgate.

Q : Press to lock all doors and thetailgate. Lock and unlock feedbackcan be personalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. Press 7 andhold for at least three seconds tosound the panic alarm. Press 7again to cancel the panic alarm.

See Keys 0 25 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.


In Brief 9

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 30.

Door LocksThere are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks.

From inside, pull the door handleonce to unlock the door. Pull againto open the door.

Power Door Locks

Crew/Double Cab Premium TrimShown, Other Models Similar

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks 0 31 and PowerDoor Locks 0 32.

Windows

Power Windows


The driver door has a switch tocontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door has a switch tocontrol that window. The powerwindows work when the ignition is inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,


10 In Brief

or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 189.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up to raiseit. See Windows 0 42 and PowerWindows 0 43.

Express Windows

The express window feature allowsthe windows to be raised andlowered without holding the switch.

To activate express-down, press theswitch down fully and release.

The driver window has anexpress-up feature. Pull the switchup fully and release to activate.

Power Sliding Rear Window

If equipped, the power sliding rearwindow works when the ignition hasbeen turned to ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 189.

. Press the switch to open thewindow.

. Pull the switch to close thewindow.

The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 49.


In Brief 11

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the power lumbar support:

. Press and hold the controlforward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 49.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 50.

Memory Features

The SET, 1, 2, andB (Exit) buttonson the driver door are used tomanually store and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable pedals.

Automatic Memory Recall and/orEasy Exit Recall features may beenabled in the PersonalizationMenus.

See Memory Seats 0 51 andVehicle Personalization 0 136.


12 In Brief

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated Seat

Buttons Similar

If equipped, the buttons are on thecenter stack. To operate, the enginemust be running.

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

PressC to ventilate the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 52.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints 0 48 andPower Seat Adjustment 0 49.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.

. Safety Belts 0 54.

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 0 56.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 56.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 80.


In Brief 13

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system (ifequipped) turns off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 67.

The passenger airbag statusindicator lights on the on theoverhead console are visible when

the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 113.

Mirror AdjustmentUsing hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

Base Power Mirrors

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver side or passenger sidemirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right or left.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle andthe area behind it can be seen.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Uplevel with Power FoldingMirrors

1. Press (1) or (3) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.


14 In Brief


4. Press either (1) or (3) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors 0 39.

If equipped with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (2) again to fold themirrors in to the folded position.

See Folding Mirrors 0 40.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See Memory Seats0 51.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

The automatic dimming mirror willautomatically reduce the glare fromthe headlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on when thevehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror 0 42.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the tilt and telescopingsteering wheel:

1. Push the lever (1) down tomove the steering wheelforward or rearward. Lift thelever up to lock the wheel inplace.

2. Pull the lever (2) toward you tomove the steering wheel up ordown, then release the lever tolock the wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.


In Brief 15

The switch used to adjust thepedals is on the center stack, belowthe climate controls.

Lift the switch up to move thepedals closer to your body. Pressthe switch down to move thepedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal 0 184.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position or usingRetained Accessory Power (RAP).


16 In Brief

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 152.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle is inP (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped),front/rear sidemarker lamps, andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 146.

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 149.

. Fog Lamps 0 151.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz on it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

Lm : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer0 100.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilationin the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.


In Brief 17

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger TemperatureControl

7. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

8. Rear Window Defogger

9. Power Button

10. Air Recirculation

11. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 157.

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode buttonis on the shift lever.

To enable Range Selection:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode). The currentrange will appear next to the M.This is the highest possiblerange with all lower gearsaccessible. As an example,when 5 (Fifth) gear is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gearsare available.

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons toselect the range of gears forcurrent driving conditions. SeeManual Mode 0 196.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haulmode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 199.

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,the engine's driving power can besent to all four wheels for extratraction.


18 In Brief

Transfer Case Controls

The vehicle will have one of twostyles of transfer case controls. Usethese controls to shift into and out ofthe different four-wheel drivemodes.

Electronic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering column.

Automatic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering column.

The different drive options that maybe available are described following.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable.

Do not use AUTO mode to park ona steep grade with poor tractionsuch as ice, snow, mud or gravel. In

AUTO mode only the rear wheelswill hold the vehicle from slidingwhen parked. If parking on a steepgrade, use 4 m to keep all fourwheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis setting when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.

N (Neutral) : Shift to this settingonly when towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 331or Trailer Towing 0 231.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting sends maximum power to allfour wheels. Choose Four-WheelDrive Low when driving in deepsand, mud, or snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 200.


In Brief 19

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Cruise Control

5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. A white indicator comes on inthe instrument cluster when cruisecontrol is on and turns off whencruise control is off.

+ RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET − : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 211.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.


20 In Brief

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V : Press to open a menu or selecta menu item. Press and hold toreset values on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 123.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator,V, when a vehicleis detected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow avehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a flashing redalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 218.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidunintentional lane departures atspeeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW light, @, is green if a lanemarking is detected. If the vehicledeparts the lane, the light willchange to amber and flash. Inaddition, beeps will sound or thedriver seat will pulse.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)(2500/3500 Series) 0 220.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)alert as the lane marking is crossed.The system will not assist or alert ifit detects that you are actively

steering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)(2500/3500 Series) 0 220 and LaneKeep Assist (LKA) (1500 Series)0 221.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle on thecenter stack display when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) toaid with parking and low-speedbacking maneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 215.

Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to assist with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA may


In Brief 21

display a warning triangle on theRear Vision Camera screen and agraphic on the instrument cluster toprovide the object distance. Inaddition, multiple beeps or seatpulses may occur if very close to anobject.

The vehicle may also have the FrontParking Assist system.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 215.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fouraccessory power outlets.

Vehicles with a Center Console

. One or two in front of thecupholders on the centerconsole.

. One inside the center console.

. One on the rear of the centerconsole.

Vehicles with Bench Seats

. One on the center stack belowthe climate control system.

. One or two in the storage areaon the bench seat.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 102.

Universal Remote System

If equipped with the UniversalRemote system, these buttons willbe in the front overhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

See Universal Remote System0 142.

Sunroof

If equipped, the sunroof onlyoperates when the ignition is inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 189.


22 In Brief

Vent : From the closed position,press the rear of the TILT switch tovent the sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close : Toopen the sunroof, press and holdthe rear of the SLIDE switch untilthe sunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofthe SLIDE switch to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of theSLIDE switch until the sunroofreaches the desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front of theSLIDE switch. Press the switchagain to stop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadethat can be pulled forward to blockthe rays of the sun. Open and closethe sunshade manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof 0 45.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started andbegins to move.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release g on the center

stack. The traction off light idisplays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate DriverInformation Center (DIC)message displays. See RideControl System Messages0 130.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdg until i and g illuminate in theinstrument cluster and the


In Brief 23

appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages 0 130.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 208.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommended

pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 302.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

To reset the engine oil life system:

1. Display REMAINING OIL LIFEon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 123.

2. Press and hold the V button onthe DIC. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press the acceleratorpedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display REMAINING OIL LIFEon the DIC. If the displayshows 100%, the system isreset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 261.


24 In Brief

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel0 225. For all other vehicles, useonly the unleaded gasolinedescribed under Fuel 0 223.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 367.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 25

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 30Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 32Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DoorsTailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 35Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 37

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . 41Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 42Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


26 Keys, Doors, and Windows

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allowattachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain toreduce the risk of unintentionally

moving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

Programming Keys

Follow these procedures to programup to eight keys to the vehicle.



Programming with aRecognized Key

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn the key to the ON/RUN position.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF,and remove the key.

3. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without aRecognized Key

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that owners see their dealer.

If there are no currently recognizedkeys available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys you wish to program must bewith you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn to ON/RUN. The securitylight will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turnto ON/RUN; the key is learnedand all previously known keyswill no longer work with thevehicle.

Remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with aRecognized Key.”

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 377.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.



. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 27.

With Remote Start (withoutRemote Start Similar)

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) :If equipped,/ is used to start theengine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 30.

Q (Lock) : Press to lock all doorsand the tailgate.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirps

when Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System 0 35.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors. Theauto mirror folding feature will notoperate unless it is enabled. SeeFolding Mirrors 0 40 and VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

K (Unlock) : Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors and the tailgateunlock. The interior lamps maycome on and stay on for 20 secondsor until the ignition is turned on.

If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization 0 136. If enabledthrough the DIC, the exterior lampsmay turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 136.



Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 136.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors.The auto mirror folding feature willnot operate unless it is enabled.See Folding Mirrors 0 40 andVehicle Personalization 0 136.

On some models, press, releaseand then press and hold K to openall of the windows. Pressing thebutton again will stop the windows.

See Vehicle Alarm System 0 35.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm) : Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theturn signal lamps flash and the hornsounds three times.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/

RUN or 7 is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.See your dealer for transmitterprogramming.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate and remove the backcover of the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a coin.



2. Press and slide the batterydown toward the pocket of thetransmitter in the direction ofthe key ring. Do not use ametal object.

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitterback cover top side first, andthen the bottom toward thekey ring.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemwill come on when the vehicle isstarted remotely, depending on theoutside temperature.

The rear defog and heated andventilated seats, if equipped, mayalso come on. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 52 andVehicle Personalization 0 136.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if thevehicle is low on fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The key is in the ignition.

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may bereduced while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 27 or VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.



The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. After30 seconds, repeatSteps 1 and 2 for a 10-minutetime extension.

Place the ignition in ON/RUN tooperate the vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by 10 minutes, for a totalof 20 minutes, if during the first10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 arerepeated while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested 30 seconds after starting.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off to useremote start again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks. See Power Door Locks 0 32.



From inside, pull the door handleonce to unlock the door. Pull thehandle again to open the door.

See Vehicle Alarm System 0 35.

Power Door Locks


Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingIf equipped, when locking the doorswith the power lock switch and adoor open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. Three chimes signal thatdelayed locking is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice overrides the delayed lockingfeature and immediately locks alldoors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

Turn delayed locking on or off usingvehicle personalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on a door.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Lockout ProtectionWhen locking is requested with thedriver door open and the key in theignition, all the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.



Crew/Double Cab PremiumShown, Others Similar

Press { to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated. Press {again to deactivate. The vehiclemust be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 189.

If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.

Doors

Tailgate

{ Warning

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgate caneasily lose their balance and fallin response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Besure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a safety beltproperly.

On vehicles with a lock on thetailgate, use the key to lock orunlock the tailgate.

Open the tailgate by lifting up on itshandle while pulling thetailgate down.

To shut the tailgate, firmly push itupward until it latches.

After closing the tailgate, pull it backto be sure it latches securely.

Tailgate Removal

The tailgate can be removed toallow for different loading situations.Assistance may be needed with theremoval to avoid damage to thevehicle.

On vehicles with a Rear VisionCamera, it must be disconnectedbefore removing the tailgate. SeeDriver Assistance Systems 0 214.

To remove the tailgate:



1. Raise the tailgate and supportit firmly. Pull out and hold thecable retaining clip (1). Pushthe cable (3) up and off of thebolt (2). Repeat on theother side.

2. With the tailgate about halfwayopen, lift the right edge of thetailgate from the lower pivot.

On vehicles with the tailgateassist feature, raise the tailgatenearly all the way to the closedposition prior to removing theleft edge.

3. Move the tailgate to the rightand away to release theleft edge.

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe tailgate. Make sure the tailgateis secure.

Power Assist StepsIf equipped, the power assist steps,when enabled, will extend when thedoor is opened. They will retractthree seconds after the door isclosed or immediately if the vehiclestarts moving.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the powerassist steps when in motion.

The steps will reverse direction ifthere is an obstruction. Remove theobstruction, then open and close thedoor on the same side to completethe motion. If the obstruction is notcleared, the assist steps remainextended.

Slight movement of the steps whileextended is normal.

Kick Switch

1. Place the vehicle in P (Park)and unlock the doors.

2. Kick the switch to extend thepower assist step to the tire.A DIC message displays.

3. Kick the switch again to returnto normal operation.

Center Stack Switch

The power assist steps can beextended and extended to the tireby pressingj. When extending

the steps withj, the kick switch isdisabled.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) orN (Neutral). To extend the steps:



. Pressj to extend both steps.A DIC message displays.

. Pressj again to extend to thetire. A DIC message displays.

. Pressj again to return tonormal operation.

Enable/Disable

To enable or disable the powerassist steps, press and holdj forfour seconds. A DIC messagedisplays.

Cleaning

Clean the power assist stepsregularly. For an automatic carwash, extend the steps while inN (Neutral) using the center stackswitch. The steps will stow whenshifting into D (Drive).

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the liftgate or the hoodis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-seconddelay and immediately arm thealarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.



If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door withthe key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages 0 132.

Inclination Sensor andIntrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have an,inclination sensor and intrusionsensor.

The inclination sensor can set offthe alarm if it senses movement ofthe vehicle, such as a change invehicle orientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remainin the vehicle when the intrusionsensor is activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors andwindows are completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such assunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking thesensors in the front overheadconsole.

. Close DVD screens, if equipped,before leaving the vehicle.



Inclination and IntrusionSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors bedeactivated if pets are left in thevehicle or if the vehicle is beingtransported.

With the vehicle turned off, presso in the front overhead console.The indicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled for thenext alarm system arming cycle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

Immobilizer Operation

This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. It may benecessary to check the fuse. SeeFuses 0 285. If the engine still doesnot start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may befaulty. See your dealer.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementkeys. Up to eight keys can beprogrammed for the vehicle. Toprogram additional keys, see Keys0 25. To program additionaltransmitters, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.



Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the vehicletheft system in the vehicle.

See your dealer to get a new keyblank cut exactly as the ignition keythat operates the system.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

If equipped, adjust trailer-towmirrors for a clear view of the areabehind you. Manually pull out themirror head to extend it for bettervisibility when towing a trailer.

The lower portion of the mirror isconvex. A convex mirror's surface iscurved to see more from the driverseat. The convex mirror can beadjusted manually to the driverpreferred position for better vision.

The mirror may have a turn signalarrow that flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.



If equipped, the mirror housing mayhave auxiliary cargo and clearancelamps. See Cargo Lamp 0 152 andExterior Lamp Controls 0 146.

Power MirrorsUsing hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Base Power Mirrors

The power mirror controls are on thedriver door.


2. Press one of the four arrows onthe control pad to move themirror in the desired direction.


4. Move the selector switch to thecenter position when notadjusting either outside mirror.

Crew/Double Cab PremiumShown, Other Models Similar


2. Press one of the four arrows onthe control pad while theindicator light on button (1)

or (2) is illuminated, to movethe mirror in the desireddirection.


4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

If you do not deselect the mirror, thefeature will turn off after aboutone minute.

The mirrors may include a memoryfunction that works with the memoryseats. See Memory Seats 0 51.



Folding Mirrors


Power Folding

If equipped with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (2) again to fold themirrors in to the folded position.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See Memory Seats0 51.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

. The mirrors will not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Manually fold both mirrors if theyare out of sync. Fold and unfold themirrors three times using the mirrorcontrols to reset them to theirnormal position. A popping noisemay be heard. This sound is normalafter a manual folding operation.

Manual Folding

If equipped, push the mirror towardthe vehicle to fold. Push the mirroroutward to return to its originalposition.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

Auto Mirror Folding

If equipped, with the ignition off,press and hold Q on the RKEtransmitter for approximatelyone second to automatically fold theexterior mirrors. Press and hold Kon the RKE transmitter forapproximately one second to unfold.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.

This feature is turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 136.

Turn Signal Indicator

If equipped, indicator lights on themirror flash in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsIf equipped with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to heat the mirrors. If thevehicle has towing mirrors, only theupper glass of the mirror is heated.The lower convex part of the towingmirrors is not heated.



See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 157.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofthe headlamps from behind. Thisfeature comes on when the vehicleis started.

Blind Spot MirrorsIf equipped, there is a small convexmirror built into the upper and outercorner of the driver outside rearviewmirror. It can show objects that maybe in the vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicleis a long distance away, theimage in the main mirror issmall and near the inboardedge of the mirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitionsfrom the main mirror to theblind spot mirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appearsin the blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blind



zone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double checkbefore moving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 136.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview 0 377.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe mirror will automatically reducethe glare of the headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson each time the vehicle is started.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in a



pulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys 0 25.


The driver door has a switch tocontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door has a switch tocontrol that window.

The power windows:

. Can be operated with theignition in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

. Can be operated in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 189.

. Will stop operation when anydoor is opened.

Press the switch down to lower thewindow, and pull up the front of theswitch to raise the window.

Express-Down Windows

The express-down feature allowsthe window to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express-down feature.The express-down feature can becanceled at any time by brieflypressing the switch.

Express-Up Window

The driver window express-upfeature allows the window to beraised without holding the switch.Pull the window switch up fully andrelease it to activate the express-upfeature. The express-up feature canbe canceled at any time by brieflypulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the driver power



window will need to bereprogrammed for the express-upfeature to work.

To reprogram the power windows:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START.

3. From any open position, pullthe power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Hold the switch up forapproximately two secondsafter the window is fully closed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when express-up is active,the window stops at the obstacleand auto-reverses to a presetfactory position. Weather conditionssuch as severe icing also cause thewindow to auto-reverse. Thewindow returns to normal operationonce the obstacle or condition isremoved.

Express Window Anti-PinchOverride

{ Warning

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

The anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode.Hold the window switch in thepartially or fully pulled up position.The window rises for as long as theswitch is held. Once the switch isreleased, the express mode isreactivated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Window Lockout


Z (Window Lockout) : The driverdoor power window switch has alockout feature. This featureprevents the rear windows fromoperating, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to engageor disengage the lockout feature. Anindicator light on the switch willcome on when the lockout feature isengaged, and will go off whendisengaged.



Rear Windows

Power Sliding Rear Window

If equipped, the power sliding rearwindow works when the ignition hasbeen turned to ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 189.

. Press the switch to open thewindow.

. Pull the switch to close thewindow.

The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow or, if equipped, extendalong the rod.

Roof

Sunroof

If equipped, the sunroof operateswhen the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 189.

Vent : From the closed position,press the rear of the TILT switch tovent the sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close : Toopen the sunroof, press and holdthe rear of the SLIDE switch until



the sunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofthe SLIDE switch to close it

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of theSLIDE switch until the sunroofreaches the desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front of theSLIDE switch. Press the switchagain to stop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshade,which can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunrooftracks.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


Seats and Restraints 47

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 49Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 50Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . 60Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 60Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 63When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Passenger Sensing System . . . 67Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 72

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 73Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Infants and Young Children . . . . 75Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 77Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 79Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 80

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Securing Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89


48 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the restraintdown. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.

The head restraints adjust forwardand rearward. To adjust the headrestraint forward, grasp the headrestraint and pull forward to thedesired locking position. To adjust



the head restraint rearward, graspthe head restraint and pull forwardfully until the mechanism releasesand allows the head restraint toreturn to the full rear position.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Rear Seats

The rear seat has adjustableheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions.

The height of the headrest can beadjusted. Pull the headrest up toraise it. To lower the headrest, pushthe headrest down.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 80.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the recline, see RecliningSeatbacks 0 50.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 49.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibratingpulse alert in the driver seat to helpthe driver avoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems 0 214.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the power lumbar support:



. Press and hold the controlforward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Memory Seats

Crew/Double Cab Shown, OtherModels Similar

If memory equipped, the SET, 1, 2,andB (Exit) buttons on the driverdoor are used to manually store andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and adjustablepedals (if equipped).

Storing Memory Positions

To store positions to the 1 and 2buttons:

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable pedals(if equipped) to the desireddriving positions.

3. Press and release SET. A beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold 1until two beeps sound.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 2.

To store positions to theB (Exit)button and easy exit features,repeat Steps 1–4 above to storeyour positions for getting out of thevehicle.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB (Exit) tomanually recall the previouslystored memory positions. Releasing1, 2, orB (EXIT) before the storedpositions are reached stops therecall.

Automatically Recalling MemoryPositions (Auto Recall)

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, the Auto(Automatic) Memory Recall featureautomatically recalls the currentdriver’s previously stored 1 or 2position when the ignition ischanged from OFF to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

See “Auto Memory Recall” under“Comfort and Convenience” inVehicle Personalization 0 136.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror orpower seat controls; or press theadjustable pedal control (ifequipped).

RKE Transmitters are not labeledwith a number. If your memory seatposition is stored to 1 or 2 but thisposition is not automaticallyrecalling, then store your positionsto the other button or switch RKEtransmitters with the other driver.



Easy Exit Recall

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, the easy exitfeature automatically recalls thepreviously storedB (Exit) position.See “Storing Memory Positions”listed previously. See also VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

Easy exit recall automaticallyactivates when one of the followingoccurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or adjustable pedals whilerecalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction. Then do one of thefollowing:

. For manual or automatic recallpositions, press and hold theappropriate manual control for

two seconds. Try recalling againby pressing the appropriatememory button.

. For exit recall position, pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the exit feature notrecalling for two seconds. Thentry recalling the exit positionagain.

If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates against

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

heat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated Seat

Buttons Similar

If equipped, the buttons are on thecenter stack. To operate, the enginemust be running.



PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press C to ventilate the driver orpassenger seat.

The indicator light on the buttoncomes on when this feature is on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh for an extended time, their levelmay automatically be lowered.

Remote Start Auto Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats can be turned onautomatically. When it is coldoutside, the heated seats turn on,and when it is hot outside theventilated seats turn on. The heated

or ventilated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or ventilated seat buttonto use the heated or ventilated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights do not turn on duringa remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 30 andVehicle Personalization 0 136.

Rear SeatsFolding Rear Seat

Either side of the rear seat can befolded for added cargo space.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Make sure that nothing is on theseat cushion.



To fold the seat, slowly pull the seatcushion up.

To return the seat to the normalseating position, slowly pull the seatcushion down.

Make sure the safety belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatcushion.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders 0 112.

This vehicle may have the SafetyBelt Assurance System, which mayprevent the vehicle from shifting outof P (Park). See Safety BeltMessages 0 132.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 73 or Infants and YoungChildren 0 75. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.



The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System 0 67 for moreinformation.

If the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender 0 60.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section.



5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Always stow the safety belt slowly.If the safety belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull thesafety belt straight out firmly tounlock the webbing, and thenrelease it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustment

could reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 56.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.



Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash. If the vehicle has rollovercapable roof-rail airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andthe vehicle’s safety belt system willprobably need other new parts. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash 0 60.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for the rearoutboard seating positions.Instructions are included with theguide.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayed

safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 0 112.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care 0 60.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.



New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 113.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and theperson seated directly behindthe front outboard passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG on the trimor on a label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theseatback closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safety

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

belts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? 0 64.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

sit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The safety belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 73 orInfants and Young Children 0 75.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 113 for moreinformation.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of an

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

inflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 61.Airbags are designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.

Deployment thresholds are used topredict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors which help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, if the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) is at orbelow 3 855 kg (8,500 lb), thevehicle has advanced technologyfrontal airbags. You can find theGVWR on the Certification/Tire labelon the center pillar of the vehicle.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 176 formore information.

Advanced technology frontal airbagsadjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Vehicles withadvanced technology frontal airbagshave a seat position sensor thatenables the sensing system tomonitor the position of the driverseat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.



If the GVWR is at or below 4 536 kg(10,000 lb), the vehicle hasseat-mounted side impact airbags.Vehicles with a GVWR above4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may nothave seat-mounted side impactairbags. Seat-mounted side impactairbags, if equipped, are designedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are not designed toinflate in frontal impacts, near frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Vehicles with a GVWR up to andincluding 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) haveroof-rail airbags. These roof-railairbags are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashesdepending on the location of theimpact. In addition, these roof-railairbags are designed to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. The roof-rail airbagsare not designed to inflate in rearimpacts. Both roof-rail airbags willinflate when either side of the

vehicle is struck or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

Vehicles with a GVWR above4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may notbe equipped with roof-rail airbags.These roof-rail airbags, if equipped,are designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact. Bothroof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck.In addition, these roof-rail airbagsare designed to inflate in a severefrontal impact. If the vehicle hassingle rear wheels, the roof-railairbags are rollover capable. If thevehicle has dual rear wheels andhas roof-rail airbags, the roof-railairbags are not rollover capable.If the airbags are rollover capable,both roof-rail airbags will also inflateif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over onits side. The roof-rail airbags are notdesigned to inflate in rear impacts.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 63.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.



Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 64.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 63.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,and turn off the interior lamps, and



turn off the hazard warning flashersby using the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 374and Event Data Recorders0 375.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle may have a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol for



on or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 113.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.



When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 113.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints should

wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 113 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) 0 87 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) 0 89.

Make sure the safety beltretractor is locked by pullingthe shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor wheninstalling the child restraint,even if the child restraint isequipped with a safety beltlock-off. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Then



slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 48.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way,the child restraint lockingfeature will be engaged. Thismay unintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way,and then buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two to three minutesafter the on indicator is lit.



{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 72for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 372.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

are close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, overhead console,front sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 67.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 311 for additionalimportant information.

If a snow plow is added to thevehicle, the airbags should still workproperly. The airbag systems weredesigned to work properly under awide range of conditions, includingsnow plowing with vehicles thathave the optional snow plow preppackage (RPO VYU). Do notchange or defeat the snow plow's“tripping mechanism.” If you do, itcan damage the snow plow and thevehicle, and may cause an airbagdeployment.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 365.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 113.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 63. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 113.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:



. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if equipped.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 56. If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 56.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neither



the vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, the



restraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 80. Children canbe endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions are



important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 67 for additional information.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the child

restraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.



Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments. In thiscase, the safety belt must be used(with top tether where available) tosecure the child restraint. See

Securing Child Restraints (RearSeat) 0 89 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Passenger Seat)0 89.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.



Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor) : Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor) : Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors on crew cab models, eachseating position with lower anchorshas two labels near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

The top tether anchors are the loopsnear the top of the seatback foreach rear seating position. Theseloops will be used to route the toptether through, as well as to securethe top tether to the vehicle. Be sureto use the anchor (loop) on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Be sure to read the followinginstructions to properly install a childrestraint using these loops.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 79 for additionalinformation.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor,except for the center top tetheranchors in the crew cab models.Attaching more than one child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

tightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 79.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the child

restraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. For forward facing childrestraints, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor (loop), if your vehiclehas one. Follow the childrestraint instructions thevehicle LATCH anchor weightlimits described at thebeginning of this section, andthe following steps:

Example — Rear Driver SidePosition



Example — Rear Driver SidePosition

2.1. For a top tether in the reardriver side position:

2.1.1. Raise the headrest.

2.1.2. Route the toptether (4) betweenthe headrest posts,through theloop (3), behind theinboard headrestpost, and under thecenter shoulderbelt (2).

2.1.3. Then attach the toptether (4) to the toptetheranchor (loop) (1) atthe center rearseating position.

2.2. For a top tether in the rearcenter position:

2.2.1. Route the toptether (4) throughthe center loop (1),and behind thepassenger sideheadrest post.

2.2.2. Then attach the toptether (4) to the toptether anchor (loop)at the rearpassenger sideseating position.

2.3. For a top tether in the rearpassenger position:

2.3.1. Raise the headrest.

2.3.2. Route the toptether (4) betweenthe headrest posts,through the loop onthe passenger side

and behind theinboardheadrest post.

2.3.3. Then attach the toptether (4) to the toptetheranchor (loop) (1) atthe center rearseating position.

3. Tighten the top tether per thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions.

When the top tether is properlytightened, the anchor (loop)may bend. This is normal andwill not damage the vehicle.

If child restraints are installedin both outboard positions, bothtop tethers can be attached tothe center loop. Top tetherscan be attached for childrestraints in all three rearseating positions at the sametime, following the routinginstructions above.

4. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To



check, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement for properinstallation.

Headrest Removal andReinstallation

Removing Rear Headrests

For outboard rear seating positions,if the child restraint cannot beinstalled properly with the head restin place, the headrest may beremoved. See your dealer forassistance with removal and storethe removed headrests in a secureplace. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestbefore the seating position is used.

Reinstalling Rear Headrests

To reinstall the headrest:

1. Insert the headrest posts intothe holes in the top of theseatback with the longerchrome plated post toward thedriver side of the vehicle.

2. Push the headrest all the waydown until it contacts the top ofthe seatback.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 80 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 80 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 79.

If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether,attach and tighten the top tether tothe top tether anchor. Refer to theinstructions that came with the childrestraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 80.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 80.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

For outboard rear seating positions,if the child restraint cannot beinstalled properly with the headrestin place, the headrest may beremoved. See your dealer forassistance with removal, and store



the removed headrest in a secureplace. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestbefore the seating position is used.For reinstallation instructions, see“Headrest Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 80.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)

Light-Duty Vehicles

This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 79.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 67and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 113 for more informationon this, including important safetyinformation.


{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbag

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 67 for additional information.

If a child restraint uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 80 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.




When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 113.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety belt

through or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


Position the release button sothat the safety belt could bequickly unbuckled if necessary.







If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 67 for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Heavy-Duty Vehicles

This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 79.


{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. Always secure arear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

If a child restraint uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 80 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.




When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would beable to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.






7. If your child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 80 for moreinformation on using the toptether anchors.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


94 Storage

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . 94Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . 94Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . 95Center Console Storage . . . . . . . 95Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . 96

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Card Holder

If equipped, there is a card holderon the front instrument panel to theleft of the steering wheel.

Glove Box

To access the upper glove box,unlock with the key and pull up onthe handle.

To access the lower glove box, pulldown on the handle.


Storage 95

Cupholders

Front

There may be cupholders on thecenter front seat console armrest.

Rear

If equipped, pull the rear seatarmrest down to access thecupholders.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover andrelease to access.

Center Console Storage

Press the latch and lift to open.Depending on the options there maybe a tote compartment, accessorypower outlet, auxiliary jack, andUSB port(s) inside. There areopenings for power cords on theedge of the storage area.

See Power Outlets 0 102 and theinfotainment manual.


96 Storage

Floor Console Storage

If equipped with front seat floorconsole storage, unlock with theignition key, press the button, andlift to open.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

The vehicle may be equipped withcargo tie-downs.

Any of the nine holes inside thetruck bed can be used for tie-downs.

The maximum load is 113 kg(250 lb) per tie-down.

Caution

The truck bed walls will collapse ifthe tie-downs are overloaded.

To install:

1. Insert a tie-down loopassembly until it is flush withthe truck bed wall.

2. Turn the tie-down loopclockwise to tighten. Thetie-down will be hard to turnuntil the toggle moves past theinstallation point on the toggleguide.


Storage 97

3. Fasten the tie-down firmly byhand only. Do not use tools.

To remove:

1. Remove the tie-down loopcompletely by turningcounterclockwise while holdingthe backing plate against thetruck bed wall.

2. Pull the backing plate awayfrom the truck bed wall until aclick is heard. This locks thetoggle into position on thetoggle guide.

3. Push the backing plate againstthe truck bed wall. This allowsthe toggle nut to spin.

4. Remove the backing plate,toggle guide, and toggle nutfrom the truck bed wallcompletely.

5. Reinstall the tie-down loopthrough the backing plate intothe toggle nut for reuse.


98 Instruments and Controls

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 99Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 99Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . 99Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 100Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Transmission TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 112Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 113Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 114Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 115

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . 117Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 118Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . 118Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light (2500/3500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light(1500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 118Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . 119Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 120Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 120

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 121Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 121Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 122Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 122Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 122Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Brake System Messages . . . . . 127Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . 127Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . 127Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . 128Engine Power Messages . . . . . 129Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . 129Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 129Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Airbag System Messages . . . . 131


Instruments and Controls 99

Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . . 132Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 132Steering SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Transmission Messages . . . . . . 133Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 136Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . 136

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 136

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 142Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the tilt and telescopingsteering wheel:

1. Push the lever (1) down tomove the steering wheelforward or rearward. Lift thelever up to lock the wheel inplace.

2. Pull the lever (2) toward you tomove the steering wheel up ordown, then release the lever tolock the wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel) : Pressto turn it on or off. A light next to thebutton displays when the feature isturned on.



The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz on it.

1 (High Speed) : Fast wipes.

w (Low Speed) : Slow wipes.

3 INT (Adjustable IntervalWipes) : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 (Mist) : For a single wipe, turnto8, then release. For several

wipes, hold the band on8 longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement 0 282.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L m (Washer Fluid) : Push thepaddle marked with the windshieldwasher symbol at the top of the turnsignal lever, to spray washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the paddle isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the paddle isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid 0 274for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.



CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages 0 127 for the messagesthat may be displayed for thecompass.

Clock

Setting the Time and Date withFaceplate Controls

To set the time or date:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select the desired function.

3. Turn the MENU knob toincrease or decrease the value.

4. Press the MENU knob to go tothe next value. After the lastvalue is selected, the systemwill update and return to theSettings menu. Press o BACKto go to the last menu andsave the changes.

Auto Set requires an activeconnection to OnStar.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the clock display:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select Clock Display.

3. Turn the MENU knob to Offor On.

4. Press the MENU knob toselect.

Press o BACK to go to the lastmenu and save the changes.

Setting the Time and Date withTouchscreen Controls

To set the time:

1. Touch SETTINGS on the HomePage, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time, then touch«orª to increase or decreasehours, minutes, and AM or PM.Touch 12–24 Hr for 12 or24 hour clock.

3. Touch S to go back to theprevious menu.



Auto Set requires an activeconnection to OnStar.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the date:


2. Touch Set Date, then touch«orª to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


To set the clock display:


2. Touch Clock Display, thentouch Off or On to turn theclock display off or on.


Power OutletsPower Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fouraccessory power outlets.

Vehicles with a Center Console

. One or two in front of thecupholders on the centerconsole.

. One inside the center console.

. One on the rear of the centerconsole.

Vehicles with Bench Seats

. One on the center stack belowthe climate control system.

. One or two in the storage areaon the bench seat.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

The power outlets on the centerstack and in front of the cupholdersare powered at all times. The poweroutlets inside the storage area andon the rear of the console arepowered when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or when RAP is active.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum15 amp rating.



Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 247.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar

If equipped with this power outlet, itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

For vehicles with a center console,the 110/120 volt power outlet is infront of the cupholders in the centerconsole.

For vehicles with bench seats, the110/120 volt power outlet is on thecenter stack.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN, equipment requiring lessthan 150 watts is plugged into theoutlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 189.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.



. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps.

. Medical equipment.

Wireless ChargingThe vehicle may have wirelesscharging on top of the centerconsole. See Center ConsoleStorage 0 95. The system wirelesslycharges one PMA or Qi compatiblemobile device.

To check for phone or other devicecompatibility:

. In the U.S., see my.gmc.com/learn.

. In Canada, seegmtotalconnect.ca.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medicaldevices. If you have one, it isrecommended to consult withyour doctor before using thewireless charging system.

The vehicle must be in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). Thewireless charging feature may notcorrectly indicate charging when thevehicle is in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 189.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the phone.

{ Warning

Remove all metal objects from thecharging pad before chargingyour mobile device. Metal objects,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

such as coins, keys, rings,or paper clips, between the phoneand charging pad will becomevery hot. On the rare occasionthat the charging system does notdetect a metal object, and theobject gets wedged between thephone and charger, remove thephone and allow the metallicobject to cool before removing itfrom the charging pad, to preventburns.



To charge a mobile device:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects on the charging pad.

2. Place the mobile device faceup on the@ symbol on thecharging pad.

3. The} will display on theVon the infotainment screen.This indicates that the mobiledevice is properly positionedand charging. If a phone isplaced on the charging padand} does not display,remove the phone from thepad, and wait three secondsbefore placing/aligning thephone on the pad again.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Standard Theme Shown, Metric Similar



Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press o to access the cluster

applications. Usew orx to scrollthrough the list of availableapplications. Not all applications willbe available on all vehicles.

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays can beviewed. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 123.

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Settings

Audio

Press V to select the Audio app,

then press p to enter the Audiomenu. In the Audio menu browse formusic, select from the favorites,or change the audio source. Useworx to change the station or go tothe next or previous track.

Phone

Press V to select the Phone app,

then press p to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recentcalls, or scroll through contacts.

If there is an active call, mute thephone or switch to handsetoperation.

Navigation

Press V to select the Navigation

app, then press p to enter theNavigation menu. If there is noactive route, you can resume thelast route and turn the voiceprompts on/off. If there is an activeroute, press V to cancel or resumeroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Settings

Press V to select the Settings app,

then press p to enter the Settings

menu. Usew orx to scrollthrough items in the Settings menu.

Units : Press p while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose English, Imperial, or metricunits by pressing V while thedesired item is highlighted.A checkmark will be displayed nextto the selected item.



Display Themes : There are threeinstrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from:Standard, Technology, and Media.

Info Pages : Press p while InfoPages is displayed to enter the InfoPages menu and select the items tobe displayed in the Info app. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 123.

Speed Warning : The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press p when Speed Warning is

displayed. Pressw orx to adjust

the value. Press V to set the speed.Once the speed is set, this featurecan be turned off by pressing Vwhile viewing this page. If theselected speed limit is exceeded, apop-up warning is displayed with achime.

Software Information : Displaysopen source software information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles. The odometerdisplays on the Speed page of theDriver Information Center (DIC).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 123.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Standard Theme Shown

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:



. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric, Standard Theme Shown

English, Standard Theme Shown

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity.

A reading outside the normaloperating range can be caused by adangerously low oil level or someother problem causing low oilpressure. Check the vehicle's oil assoon as possible. See “OIL



PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE”under Engine Oil Messages 0 128and Engine Oil 0 258.

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge



This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's enginecoolant.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the red warning area,the engine is too hot. Pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.



TransmissionTemperature Gauge



This gauge appears when thevehicle is in Tow/Haul Mode andshows the transmission fluidtemperature. If the gauge is readingin the red area and/or a messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle must bestopped and the cause checked.One possible cause is a low fluidlevel in the transmission.

See Transmission Messages 0 133.

Caution

Do not drive the vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating,or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

Voltmeter Gauge

Standard Theme Shown

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.



When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light 0 114for more information. The voltmetergauge may also read lower when infuel economy mode. This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off all

accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner and unplug allchargers and accessories.

Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue several

times if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There may be a passenger safetybelt reminder light near thepassenger airbag status indicator.See Passenger Sensing System0 67.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if the



passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System 0 61.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages0 131.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle may have a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 67 for importantsafety information. The overheadconsole has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

United States



Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 113 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays amessage.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 126.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.



Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inON/RUN and the engine is notrunning. See Ignition Positions0 185.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 252.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow theprevious guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. A loose or missing fuel cap maycause the light to come on. SeeFilling the Tank 0 226. A few



driving trips with the capproperly installed may turn thelight off.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 223.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 247. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there isa problem.



When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal can go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 331.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 116 and Brake System Messages0 127.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

The four-wheel-drive light comes onwhen the transfer case is shiftedinto four-wheel drive and the frontaxle engages. LO or HI will also benext to this light when the vehicle isin four-wheel low or four-wheel high.

Some delay between the shiftingand the light coming on is normal.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 200.



Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 199.

Hill Descent Control Light

If equipped, the Hill Descent Controllight comes on when the system isready for use. When the lightflashes, the system is active.

See Hill Descent Control (HDC)0 210.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light (2500/3500Series)

This light is green if LDW is on andready to operate.

This light changes to amber andflashes to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed withoutusing a turn signal in that direction.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)(2500/3500 Series) 0 220.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light (1500 Series)

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turningthe steering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert, to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500Series) 0 221.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.



See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 218.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.




Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating 0 270.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating 0 270.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages 0 133.Stop as soon as possible, and

inflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressure0 300.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 303.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating range

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

and the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicle

serviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 37.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 148.



IntelliBeam® Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled.

See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 146.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps 0 151 for more information.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 146.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl 0 211.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info App. See Instrument Cluster0 106. The displays show the statusof many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the rightsteering wheel control.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V (Set/Reset) : Press to open amenu or select a menu item. Pressand hold to reset values on certainscreens.

DIC Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press o to access the clusterapplications.

2. Pressw orx to scroll to theSettings application.

3. Press V to enter theSettings menu.

4. Scroll to Info Pages andpress p.

5. Pressw orx to movethrough the list of possibleinformation displays.

6. Press V while an item ishighlighted to select ordeselect that item. When anitem is selected, a checkmarkwill appear next to it.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Settingsapp. See “DIC Info Page Options”earlier in this section.

Speed : Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph). The vehicleodometer is also shown onthis page.

Trip A or Trip B, Average FuelEconomy, and Average Speed :Shows the current distance traveled,in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), since the trip odometerwas last reset.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)



or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change.

The Average Speed display showsthe average speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the trip odometer,the average fuel economy, and theaverage speed. Or press p andselect reset in the menu.

Fuel Range and InstantaneousFuel Economy : Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fuel

economy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. It also shows if theActive Fuel Management is activeand in V4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement® 0 192.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the approximatecurrent fuel economy in either litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently asdriving conditions change.

Timer and Fuel Used : This displaycan be used as a timer. To start thetimer, press V while this display isactive. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset. Tostop the timer, press V briefly whilethis display is active and the timer isrunning.

This also shows the number ofliters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel usedsince the last reset of thismenu item.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the timer and fuelused. Each of these items can bereset individually by pressing pwhile this display is active.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages 0 128.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 258.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 346.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not to reset the OilLife display at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset the



engine oil life system, press andhold V for several seconds whilethe Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 261.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber. See Tire PressureMonitor System 0 302 and TirePressure Monitor Operation 0 303.

Best Fuel Economy : Displaysaverage fuel economy, the best fueleconomy over the selecteddistance, and a bar graph showinginstantaneous fuel economy.

Press p to change the selected

distance. Press and hold V whilethis display is active to reset thebest fuel economy and average fueleconomy. This display can also bereset by selecting reset in the menu.

Top Consumers : Shows a list ofthe features that are currentlyimpacting the fuel economy, in order

from highest to lowest. If a feature isturned off, it will be removed fromthe list.

Economy Trend : Shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 50 km (30 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. During driving the bars willshift to always reflect the mostrecent distance on the right side.Press and hold V to clear the graph

or press p to reset throughthe menu.

ECO Index : The bar graphprovides feedback on the efficiencyof current driving behavior. Thegraph shows a value that is basedon current fuel consumptioncompared to what is expected fromthe vehicle with good and baddriving habits. It also shows if theActive Fuel Management is activeand in V4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement® 0 192.

Engine Hours : Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.This display also shows the engineidle hours.

Trailer Brake : On vehicles with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, the trailer brakedisplay appears in the DIC.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed as a bar graph. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.

Speed Signs : Shows signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation.

Following Distance : Used toselect the alert timing for theForward Collision Alert (FCA). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 218.

Blank Page : Shows noinformation.



Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge : Shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Off Road : Displays vehicle pitchand roll information, road wheelangle, and four-wheel drive (4WD)status.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.


Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s battery isseverely discharged, this messagewill display and four chimes willsound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continues todischarge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thebattery voltage drops belowexpected levels and features aredisabled. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessory features.



SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument cluster. See ChargingSystem Light 0 114. Driving with thisproblem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

TRANSPORT MODE ON

This message is displayed when thevehicle is in transport mode. Somefeatures can be disabled while inthis mode, including RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), remote start,and the vehicle alarm system. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for serviceto turn transport mode off.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid 0 275.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays and a chimemay sound when there is a problemwith the ITBC system.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull your vehicle over tothe side of the road and turn theignition off. Check the wiringconnection to the trailer and turn theignition back on. If this message stilldisplays, either your vehicle or thetrailer needs service. See yourdealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment 0 237 for moreinformation.

Compass MessagesDashes may be displayed if thevehicle temporarily losescommunication with the GlobalPositioning System (GPS).

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if a door is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for



obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the hood is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge 0 110. To avoid added strainon a hot engine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive yourvehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATING IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 110.

When towing, use Tow/Haul modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 199.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the engine coolingsystem reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message clears whenthe engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System 0 261 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil 0 258 andMaintenance Schedule 0 346.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil 0 258.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stop



and allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 110.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil 0 258.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimemay sound when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating 0 270 for moreinformation.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's ability to

accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the fuel level is low.Refuel as soon as possible. SeeFuel Gauge 0 108 and Fuel 0 223.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the malfunction indicator lampon the instrument cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 115.Reinstall the fuel cap fully. SeeFilling the Tank 0 226. The

diagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thislight and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal lever to the off position.



Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

This message displays when theForward Collision Alert has beenturned off.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKEDCLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA),and Forward Collision Alert (FCA)will not operate.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) systemwhen it is temporarily unavailable.The LDW system does not needservice.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

LANE KEEPING ASSISTUNAVAILABLE

This message displays when theLane Keep Assist (LKA) and LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system istemporarily unavailable. The LKAsystem does not need service.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theParking Assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the Lane Keep

Assist (LKA), Lane DepartureWarning (LDW), and ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) features. Takethe vehicle to your dealer.

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Parking Assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See your dealer forservice.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If this message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.



SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage displays, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 208.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

This message may come on if theStabiliTrak system has not fullyinitialized because of roadconditions or the incorrect tire size.When the StabiliTrak system is fullyinitialized, the message will turn off.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 208. If thismessage continues to be displayedfor multiple ignition cycles and ondifferent road surfaces, see yourdealer for service.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when thetraction control has been turned off.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 208.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when thetraction control is active. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 208.

STABILITRAK OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system has been turnedoff. Adjust your driving accordingly.To limit wheel spin and realize thefull benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak on. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 208.

STABILITRAK OFF may alsodisplay when the stability controlhas been automatically disabled.The following conditions can causethis message to appear:

. The system is overheating,which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The brake system warning lightis on. See Brake SystemWarning Light 0 116.

. The stability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. An engine or vehicle-relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

. The transfer case is inFour-Wheel Drive Low.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.



Safety Belt Messages

SHIFTER LOCKED. BUCKLESEATBELT

This message displays if the vehicleis equipped with the Safety BeltAssurance System and the driverand front outboard passenger,if present, safety belts are notbuckled. The vehicle will not shiftout of P (Park). Buckle the safetybelt(s) to unlock the shift lever.

This system may not allow thevehicle to shift out of P (Park) if anobject — such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device — is onthe front outboard passenger seat.If this happens, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

If the driver or front outboardpassenger unbuckles their safetybelt while driving, the safety beltreminder chime and light(s) willcome on. See Safety BeltReminders 0 112.

SHIFTER UNLOCKED. BRAKETO SHIFT

This message displays when theSafety Belt Assurance System timesout and allows the vehicle to beshifted out of P (Park) after30 seconds following brake apply.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index forinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

This system may not functionproperly if the airbag readiness lightis on. See Airbag Readiness Light0 113.

Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart, so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation 0 37.

Steering SystemMessages

STEERING ASSIST ISREDUCED DRIVE WITH CARE

This message may display if aproblem occurs with the electricpower steering system. If thismessage appears, steering effortmay be slightly higher than normal.The vehicle is still safe to drive. Usecaution while in reduced assistmode. If this message is persistentor appears repeatedly, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Steering 0 166.

SERVICE POWER STEERING(1500 Series)

This message displays when thereis a problem with electric powersteering. If this message displaysand a reduction in steeringperformance or loss of powersteering assistance is noticed. Seeyour dealer. See Steering 0 166.



SERVICE POWER STEERING(2500/3500 Series)

This message displays when thereis a problem with the power steeringassist system. If this messagedisplays the vehicle can be drivenbut should be repaired as soon aspossible. See your dealer. SeeSteering 0 166.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight 0 120. Several conditions maycause this message to appear. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 303. If the warning comes on andstays on, there may be a problemwith the TPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis relearning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe relearned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection 0 306, TireRotation 0 306, Tire PressureMonitor System 0 302, and TirePressure 0 300.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low. This messagealso displays with a vehicle pictureto indicate the location of the lowtire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light 0 120. You canreceive more than one tire pressuremessage at a time. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stopas soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to those

shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tires 0 292,Vehicle Load Limits 0 176, and TirePressure 0 300. The DIC alsoshows the tire pressure values. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 123.

Transmission Messages

4WD OFF

If equipped with four-wheel drive,this message displays when thefour-wheel-drive system istemporarily disabled due to anoverheated condition. The vehiclewill run in two-wheel drive when thismessage is present. Once thefour-wheel-drive system cools down,the message turns off and thefour-wheel-drive system returns tonormal operation.

4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS

This message will display while thefour-wheel-drive system is shifting.



FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is notin N (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).

FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed istoo high, this message will displayuntil the correct vehicle speed isreached.

GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE

This message displays when gradebraking has been activated whiledriving on downhill grades. Thismessage will only appear the firsttime the feature is activated in anignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Mode0 199, Automatic Transmission0 193, and Cruise Control 0 211.

GRADE BRAKING OFF

This message displays when gradebraking has been disabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode0 199, Automatic Transmission0 193, and Cruise Control 0 211.

GRADE BRAKING ON

This message displays when gradebraking has been enabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode0 199, Automatic Transmission0 193, and Cruise Control 0 211.

SERVICE 4WD

If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,this message may display if aproblem occurs with thefour-wheel-drive system. If thismessage appears, stop as soon aspossible and turn off the vehicle.Make sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at leastone minute, then restart the vehicleand check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again when

you begin driving, thefour-wheel-drive system needsservice. See your dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays when theshift lever is in M (Manual Mode)and a transmission range has beenselected that is unavailable at thecurrent vehicle speed.

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is notin N (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOWTO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed istoo high, this message will displayuntil the correct vehicle speed isreached.



TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

When towing, use Tow/Haul Modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 199.

VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW

This message will display if thevehicle is driven in 4 n for about10 minutes above 72 km/h (45 mph).

Vehicle ReminderMessages

CHECK TRAILER WIRING

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message may display and achime may sound when one of thefollowing conditions exists:

. A trailer with electric brakesbecomes disconnected from thevehicle.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stopped, thismessage clears itself after ashort time.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage stays on until theignition is turned off.

. There is a short in the wiring tothe electric trailer brakes.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull the vehicle over to theside of the road and turn the ignitionoff. Check the wiring connection tothe trailer and turn the ignition backon. This message clears if the traileris reconnected. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. If thismessage still displays, either thevehicle or the trailer needs service.See your dealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment 0 237.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

TRAILER CONNECTED

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays briefly whena trailer with electric or electric overhydraulic brakes is first connectedto the vehicle.



This message clears itself afterseveral seconds. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. Afterthis message clears, the TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT displays appearin the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 123 and “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment 0 237.

Vehicle Speed Messages

REDUCE SPEED FOR HILLDESCENT CONTROL

This message displays whenattempting to enable Hill DescentControl (HDC) when the vehiclespeed is too high. See Hill DescentControl (HDC) 0 210.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 255 forthe location of the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Also, seeWasher Fluid 0 274 for moreinformation.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Radio Audio System Controls

1. Press the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

2. Press to select the desiredfeature setting.

3. Press o BACK on the

faceplate or the 0 screenbutton to return to the previousmenu or exit.

Turn the vehicle to ON/RUN toaccess the Settings menu, thenselect SETTINGS from the HomePage on the infotainment systemdisplay.



Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Language (Language)

. Valet Mode

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

Detailed information for each menufollows.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 101.

Language (Language)

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition will reflect the selectedlanguage.

Valet Mode (If Equipped)

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit access to vehiclestorage locations (if equipped).

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock orunlock the system. Press Back to goback to the previous menu.

Radio

Press to display the Radio menuand the following may display:

. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Auto Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Press to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volumebased on vehicle speed andambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.



Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level. To set themaximum startup volume, press +or − to increase or decrease.

Vehicle

Select and the following maydisplay:

. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may display:

. Auto Fan Max Speed

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Max Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rearwindow defogger when it is coldoutside.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingmay display:

. Alert Type

. Park Assist

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision Alert,Lane Departure Warning, and ParkAssist alerts.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Park Assist

If equipped, this allows the featureto be turned on or off. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 215.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing may display:

. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Mirror Folding

Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored1 or 2 button positions whenentering the vehicle. See MemorySeats 0 51.

Select On or Off.



Easy Exit Options

This feature moves the seatrearward automatically allowing thedriver more room to exit the vehicle.See Memory Seats 0 51.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press + or − to adjust the volume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/orpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.See Reverse Tilt Mirrors 0 42.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside rearviewmirrors will automatically fold orunfold when the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter Q or K

button is pressed and held. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:

. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlights and allows some of theexterior lamps and most of theinterior lamps to come on at nightwhen K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressedto locate the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60Seconds, or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Startand the following may display:

. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats



. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the ventilated seatson when using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

This feature enables the window toopen by using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or DriverDoor Only.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth


. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Ringtones

. Voice Mail Numbers

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”under “Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.



Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Ringtones

Press to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring tone.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT or press the EDITbutton. Type a new number, thenselect SAVE or press the SAVEbutton.

Voice


. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display


. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Pressanywhere on the display area or anyfaceplate button to turn thedisplay on.

Rear Camera


. Guidance Lines

. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 215.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 215.

Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.



Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons with the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one ofthe three Universal Remote

system buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Donot release either button untilthe indicator light goes from aslow to a rapid flashing light.Then release both buttons.

Some garage door openersmay require substitution ofStep 2 with the procedureunder “Radio Signals forCanada and Some GateOperators” later in this section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage dooractivation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press may

be required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smartbutton inside the garage on thegarage door opener receiver.



The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote systembutton for two seconds andthen release it. If the garagedoor does not move or thelamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does notmove or the garage door lampdoes not flash, press and holdthe same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,call 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This shouldtake about 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”


146 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 146Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 150Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . 151

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Battery Load Management . . . 154Battery Power Protection . . . . . 155

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O (Off) : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle is inP (Park).

AUTO (Automatic) : Automaticallyturns on the headlamps, parkinglamps, taillamps, instrument panel


Lighting 147

lights, roof marker lamps (ifequipped), front/rear sidemarkerlamps, and license plate lamps.

When the vehicle is turned off andthe headlamps are in AUTO, theheadlamps turn off. When the key isremoved, they automatically turn onfor a set time. The time of the delaycan be changed using the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 123.

; (Parking Lamps) : Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps) : Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before turning off toprevent the battery from beingdrained. Turn the headlamp controloff and then back to the headlampon position to make the headlamps

stay on for an additional 10 minutes.To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition.

# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped) :Turns on the fog lamps. See FogLamps 0 151.

IntelliBeam® System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps onand off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is darkenough and there is no other trafficpresent.

This light comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,with the turn signal lever in theneutral position, turn the exteriorlamp control to AUTO. The bluehigh-beam on light appears on theinstrument cluster when the highbeams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield thatautomatically controls the system.Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

The high-beam headlamps remainon, under the automatic control,until one of the following situationsoccurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle'sheadlamps.


148 Lighting

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system isdisabled by the high/low-beamchanger or the flash-to-passfeature. If this happens, the high/low-beam changer must beactivated two times withintwo seconds to reactivate theIntelliBeam system. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam isreactivated. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer 0 148and Flash-to-Pass 0 149.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructedfrom view, or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborneobstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end points upward,causing the light sensor to aimhigh and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

. Driving on winding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beamheadlamps may need to be disabledif any of the above conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime sounds when theheadlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on, the ignition isoff, and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the lamps off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer$ (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger) : Push the turn signallever toward the instrument panel tochange the headlamps from low tohigh beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.


Lighting 149

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long as youhold the lever toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on theinstrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to the off position andthen release. For vehicles first soldin Canada, off will only work whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicle


150 Lighting

leaves the garage, there is a slightdelay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDRL. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 152.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers are

not operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control to Oor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers) :Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Press again to turn theflashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until the lever isreleased.


Lighting 151

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out. If equipped with LEDturn signals, see your dealer.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses 0 285.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal. The message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog Lamps

The fog lamp control is on thecenter of the exterior lamp control,to the left of the steering column.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to come on.

# (Fog Lamps) : Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. A light will comeon in the instrument cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted LampIf equipped, this button includeswiring provisions for a dealer or aqualified service center to install anauxiliary roof lamp.

This button is on the overheadconsole.

When the wiring is connected to anauxiliary roof-mounted lamp,pressing the bottom of the buttonwill activate the lamp and illuminatean indicator light at the bottom of


152 Lighting

this button. Pressing the top of thebutton will turn off the roof-mountedlamp and indicator.

The emergency roof lamp circuit isfused at 30 amps, so the totalcurrent draw of the attached lampsshould be less than this value. Theattachment points for the roof lampcircuits are two blunt cut wiresabove the overhead console: a darkgreen with blue stripe switchedpower wire and a black ground wire.

For information on roof-mountedemergency lamp installation, seewww.gmupfitter.com or contact yourdealer.

If the vehicle has this button, thevehicle may have the snow plowprep package. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 247.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the steering wheel and instrumentpanel lights. The instrument panelillumination control is next to theexterior lamp control.

D (Instrument PanelIllumination) : Move thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.

Cargo Lamp

The cargo lamp provides more lightin the cargo area or on the sides ofthe vehicle, if needed. The lightsinside the pickup box and/or on theoutside rearview mirrors also turnon, if equipped.

Press the switch down to turn thecargo lamp on or off. An indicatorlight will turn on when the lamp isturned on, if equipped. The shiftlever must be in the P (Park)position to operate the cargo lamp.The lights on the outside rearview


Lighting 153

mirrors turn on if the shift lever is inthe R (Reverse), N (Neutral),or P (Park) position.

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position, or usingRetained Accessory Power (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.


154 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. When adoor is opened, the interior lampscome on if the dome lamp control isin the DOOR position. After about30 seconds the exterior lamps turnoff. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 136.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps come on when the key isremoved from the ignition. Theexterior and interior lamps remainon for a set amount of time and then

automatically turn off. The interiorlamps do not come on if the domelamp control is in the Off position.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 136.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltage

moving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.


Lighting 155

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 126.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps, if they are left on formore than 10 minutes after theignition is turned off. The cargolamp shuts off after 20 minutes. Thisprevents the battery fromrunning down.


156 Infotainment System

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.


Climate Controls 157

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemWith this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can becontrolled.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger TemperatureControl

7. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

8. Rear Window Defogger

9. Power Button

10. Air Recirculation

11. AUTO (Automatic Operation)


158 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting,start with 22°C (72°F) andallow the system time tostabilize. Then adjust thetemperature as needed for bestcomfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.Press@ to manually selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Do not cover the solar sensor on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulatesair temperature based on sun load.See “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

O (On/Off) : Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.Outside air still enters the vehicle,and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed bypressing the air delivery mode.

9 (Fan Control) : Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Press theknob to turn the fan off.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control : Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature) : Press to link thepassenger temperature setting tothe driver setting. The SYNCindicator light will turn on. When thepassenger setting is adjusted, theSYNC indicator light is off.

The driver side or passenger sidetemperature display shows thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

Air Delivery Mode Control : PressY,\,[ , or- to change thedirection of the airflow. An indicatorlight comes on in the selected modebutton.



Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level) : Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtoward the windshield and sidewindow outlets.

[ (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets.

- (Defog) : This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents. Thesystem automatically forces outsideair into the vehicle and the airconditioning compressor will run,unless the outside temperature isclose to freezing.

0 (Defrost) : Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to the

windshield and the side windowvents. The air conditioningcompressor also comes on, unlessthe outside temperature is belowfreezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

See Air Vents 0 160.

A/C (Air Conditioning) : Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning isenabled. If the fan is turned off, theair conditioner will not run. The A/Clight will stay on even if the outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

@ (Recirculation) : Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of thevehicle. It can also be used to helpreduce outside air and odors thatenter the vehicle. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

K (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The defogger turns off if theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Heated Mirror : If equipped withheated outside rearview mirrors, themirrors heat to help clear fog or frost



from the surface of the mirror whenthe rear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors 0 40.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor behind the frontgrille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of the vehicleincluding a snow plow, could causea false reading in the displayedtemperature.

Some vehicles may have theexterior temperature sensor in thepassenger side mirror instead of thefront grille area.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.

Air VentsUse the air vents in the center andon the side of the instrument panelto direct airflow. Use thethumbwheels near the air vents toopen or close off the airflow.

Air vents blow warm air on the sidewindows in cold weather. If Floor,Defog, or Defrost modes areselected, a small amount of air willcome from the vents close to thewindow. If the airflow is shut offusing the thumbwheels, warm airwill be directed to the otherinstrument panel vents. This isnormal operation.

Use the thumbwheels to turn ventairflow on or off based on the modeselected.



Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air that is pulled into thevehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule 0 346.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts 0 357.

1. Open the lower glove box doorcompletely.

2. Remove the four screws fromaround the lower glove box.The door does not need to beremoved to access the screws.

3. Close the lower glove box doorand pull it from its frame toremove the entire unit.



4. Release the two tabs holdingthe service door. Open theservice door and remove theold filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door andsecure the tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstallthe glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


Driving and Operating 163

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 165Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 167Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 172Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 173Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 175Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 176Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 184Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 186Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 191Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Active Fuel Management® . . . . 192

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 193Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 208

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . 210

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . 214Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 215

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) (2500/3500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 224Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227


164 Driving and Operating

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 246

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.



Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts0 54.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.



Steering

Electric Power Steering (1500Series)

If the vehicle has electric powersteering, it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Steering SystemMessages 0 132.

Hydraulic Power Steering(2500/3500 Series)

(2500/3500 Series – All RegularCab, Double Cab/Crew Cab withBase Interior)

The power steering system mayrequire maintenance. See PowerSteering Fluid (1500 Series) 0 273or Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500Series) 0 273.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thesystem malfunctions, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer.

(2500/3500 Series – Double Cab/Crew Cab with Uplevel Interior)

The vehicle has a power steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle.Less steering effort is required atslower speeds. At faster speeds, thesteering effort increases. Thesystem helps the steering wheelreturn to center at low speeds.Pressing the Tow/Haul button

adjusts steering effort for drivingconditions described in Tow/HaulMode 0 199.

The power steering system mayrequire maintenance, Power PowerSteering Fluid (1500 Series) 0 273or Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500Series) 0 273.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thesystem malfunctions, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.



Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.



The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive and

vehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Forcontact information about theoriginal equipment tires, see thewarranty manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Remove any underbody airdeflector, if equipped. Re-attachthe air deflector after off-roaddriving.

. See Hill Descent Control (HDC)0 210

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lower airdam. However, driving without theair dam reduces fuel economy.

Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper air flow to theengine. Re-attach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.



Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far forward and aslow as possible. Theheaviest things should beon the floor, forward of therear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roofraise the vehicle's center ofgravity, making it more likelyto roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured ifthe vehicle rolls over. Putheavy loads inside thecargo area, not on the roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits0 176 and Tires 0 292.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn 0 192.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause loss

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

of control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approachingthe top of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.



{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two‐speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to N (Neutral)can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

transfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly when

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.



. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot berestarted after stalling, set theparking brake, shift intoP (Park), and turn thevehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on the

downhill wheels, which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud— the deeper the mud, the lowerthe gear. Keep the vehicle movingto avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.



Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes and thevehicle can stall. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wetand it may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See the MaintenanceSchedule 0 346.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.



{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is

wet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 292.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

loss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) when

freezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 208.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied soonerthan when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 206.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stay with the vehicle unless there ishelp nearby. If possible, useRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 367. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and setthe fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 192.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

The Traction Control System (TCS)can often help to free a stuckvehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 208.If TCS cannot free the vehicle, see“Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out”following.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains 0 314.

Rocking the Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, shift into Four-Wheel DriveHigh. Turn the TCS off. Shift backand forth between R (Reverse) anda forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directions



causes a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 331. Recoveryhooks can be used, if the vehiclehas them.

Recovery Hooks

{ Warning

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclefrom the front.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

There are recovery hooks at thefront of the vehicle. Use them if thevehicle is stuck off-road and needsto be pulled some place to continuedriving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and a

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

crash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows the

number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 292and Tire Pressure 0 300.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.



That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 231 forimportant information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = (453 kg)(1,000 lb)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lb) × 2 =136 kg (300 lb)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lb)

Example 2

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg(1,000 lb)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lb) × 5 =340 kg (750 lb)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lb)



Example 3

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 3 = 453 kg(1,000 lb)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lb) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lb)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lb)

Refer to the Tire and LoadingInformation label for specificinformation about the vehicle'scapacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight

of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed thevehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is label is attached tothe center pillar (B-pillar). Thelabel may show the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR

includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, andcargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsomay show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To determinethe actual loads on the front andrear axles, weigh the vehicle ata weigh station. Your dealer canhelp with this. Be sure to spreadthe load equally on both sides ofthe centerline.

The Certification/Tire label alsocontains important informationabout the Front Axle ReserveCapacity. See Adding a SnowPlow or Similar Equipment0 247.

{ Warning

In the case of a sudden stopor collision, things carried inthe bed of your truck could

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

shift forward and come intothe passenger area, injuringyou and others. If you putthings in the bed of your truck,you should make sure theyare properly secured.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help load the vehicle theright way.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving“under Off-Road Driving 0 168.

Two-Tiered Loading

Depending on the model of thepickup, an upper load platformcan be created by positioningthree or four 5 cm (2 in) by15 cm (6 in) wooden planksacross the width of the pickupbox. The planks must beinserted in the pickup boxdepressions.

When using this upper loadplatform, be sure the load issecurely tied down to prevent itfrom shifting. The load's centerof gravity should be positionedin a zone over the rear axle. Thezone is located in the areabetween the front of each wheelwell and the rear of each wheel



well. The center of gravity heightmust not extend above the topof the pickup box flareboard.

Any load that extends beyondthe vehicle's taillamp area mustbe properly marked according tolocal laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When carrying removable items,a limit on how many peoplecarried inside the vehicle maybe necessary. Be sure to weighthe vehicle before buying andinstalling the new equipment.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

* EquipmentMaximumWeight

Ladder Rackand Cargo

340 kg (750 lb)

Cross Toolboxand Cargo

181 kg (400 lb)

Side Boxesand Cargo

113 kg perside (250 lbper side)

* The combined weight for allrail-mounted equipment shouldnot exceed 454 kg (1,000 lb).

Loading Points

1. Primary Load Points2. Secondary Load Areas3. GM Approved Accessory

Mounting Points

Structural members (1) and (2) areincluded in the pickup box design.Additional accessories should usethese load points. Depending on theaccessory design, use a spacerunder the accessory at the loadpoints to remove gap. The holes forGM approved accessories (3) arenot intended for aftermarket



equipment. See www.gmupfitter.comfor additional pickup box loadbearing structural information.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationA vehicle-specific Truck-CamperLoading Information label isattached to the inside of thevehicle's glove box. This labelindicates if a slide-in campercan be carried, how much of aload the vehicle can carry, andhow to correctly spread out theload. It will help to match theright slide-in camper to thevehicle.

Your dealer can help make agood vehicle-camper match andhelp determine the CargoWeight Rating (CWR).

When installing and loading aslide-in camper, check themanufacturer's instructions.

When carrying a slide-incamper, the total cargo load ofthe vehicle is the weight of thecamper plus:

. Everything added to thecamper after it left thefactory.

. Everything in the camper.

. All the people inside.

The CWR is the maximumweight of the load the vehiclecan carry. It does not include theweight of the people inside. But,use about 68 kg (150 lb) foreach seat.

The total cargo load must not bemore than the vehicle's CWR.

Refer to the Truck-CamperLoading Information label in theglove box for dimensions A andB as shown in the followingillustration.

Use the rear edge of the loadfloor for measurement purposes.The recommended location forthe cargo center of gravity is atpoint C for the CWR. It is thepoint where the mass of a bodyis concentrated and,if suspended at that point, wouldbalance the front and rear.



Here is an example of propertruck and camper match:

1. Camper Center ofGravity

2. Recommended Center ofGravity Location Zone

When the truck is used to carrya slide-in camper, the total cargoload of the truck consists of themanufacturer's camper weightfigure, the weight of installedadditional camper equipment notincluded in the manufacturer'scamper weight figure, the weightof camper cargo, and the weight

of passengers in the camper.The total cargo load should notexceed the truck's cargo weightrating, and the camper's centerof gravity (1) should fall withinthe truck's recommended centerof gravity zone (2) wheninstalled.

Any accessories or otherequipment that are added to thevehicle must be weighed. Then,subtract this extra weight fromthe CWR. This extra weight mayshorten the center of gravityzone of the vehicle.

If the slide-in camper and itsload weighs less than the CWR,the center of gravity zone for thevehicle may be larger.

Secure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of the vehicle. When thetruck-camper is loaded, drive toa scale and weigh on the frontand on the rear wheelsseparately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads

should not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings(GAWR). The total axle loadsshould not exceed the vehicle'sgross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the Certification/Tirelabel attached to the B-pillar.See “Certification/Tire Label”under Vehicle Load Limits 0 176. If weight ratings are exceeded,move or remove items to bringall weights below the ratings.

See your dealer for moreinformation on curb weights,cargo weights, Cargo WeightRating, and the correct center ofgravity zone.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 231 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The pedals can only be adjustedwhen the vehicle is in P (Park).

The switch used to adjust thepedals is on the center stack, belowthe climate controls.

Lift the switch up to move thepedals closer to your body. Pressthe switch down to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats 0 51.



Ignition Positions

Vehicles with Key Access have anignition switch with four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal must be applied.

0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 189.

This position locks the ignition andsteering wheel. It also locks thetransmission on automatictransmission vehicles. The key canbe removed in LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoes not work, then the vehicleneeds service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shifting

to N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF. Onvehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift levermust be in P (Park) to turn theignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 207.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.



Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. It alsounlocks the steering wheel. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this position

when the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition on automatic transmissionvehicles.

If the key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. The vehicle may notstart if the battery is allowed to drainfor an extended period of time.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened and theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF, and the key is in theignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 247.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damagemay occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.



Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. Turn the ignition key to START.When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speed willgo down as the engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

When the low fuel warning lightis on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it therewhile holding the key in STARTfor up to 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and

accelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Fast Idle SystemIf equipped, this feature is availableonly with cruise control. The manualfast idle switch is operated using thecruise control buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:

. The parking brake is set.

. The brake pedal is not pressed.

. The vehicle must not be movingand the accelerator must not bepressed.



To control the fast idle:

. To enable the Fast Idle System,press and release the cruisecontrol on/off button and ensurethat the switch indicator lightis lit.

. Press and release the cruisecontrol SET- button. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 rpm.

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:

. Pressing the brake.

. Selecting the cruise controlcancel button.

. Releasing the parking brake.

. Moving the transmission shiftlever out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the cruise control SET-button a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator morethan one-quarter of theway down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at or below−18 °C (0 °F). Vehicles with anengine heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.An internal thermostat in theplug-end of the cord may exist,which will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18 °C (0 °F).


To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord issecured to the driver sidefender with a clip, next to theengine compartment fuseblock. Carefully remove thewire tie that bundles theelectrical plug. Do not cut theelectrical cord.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detection

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could makeit overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows

. OnStar System (if equipped)

. Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work when the keyis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes or until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.

Accessory Power Outlets (APOs)

The vehicle may have APOs inseveral locations. See PowerOutlets 0 102.

The APOs in the console or centerseat position are powered by RAP.They will continue to work for up to



10 minutes after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, or untilthe driver door is opened.

The APOs on the center stack comefrom the factory powered directlyfrom the vehicle battery, and supplyaccessory power at all times,regardless of ignition key position.

If electronic items are left pluggedinto these APOs for long periods oftime with the vehicle off, the vehiclebattery could be drained. Thevehicle may not start if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel drive transfer casewith a N (Neutral) position, andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 228.

1. Hold the brake pedal down,then set the parking brake.

See Parking Brake 0 207.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear— not inN (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leave thevehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, the vehicle is inP (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficult

to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park 0 190.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:

. Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 326.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.



If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

This vehicle may have the SafetyBelt Assurance System, which mayprevent the vehicle from shifting outof P (Park). See Safety BeltMessages 0 132.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 123 formore information on using thisdisplay.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 190 andEngine Exhaust 0 192.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 228.

AutomaticTransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronicshift lever position indicator withinthe instrument cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition key isturned to the ON/RUN position.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

Heavy-Duty 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission Shown, Others

Similar

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 196.



P : This position locks the rearwheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you might notice an increase in theeffort to shift out of P (Park). See“Torque Lock” under Shifting IntoPark 0 190.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 190 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 228.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in N (Neutral).So, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear, Two-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low— not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 190.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 175.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart when you are alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,use N (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.



Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

. Going less than about 55 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,

or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 167.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. The adaptive shiftcontrol process continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M : This position allows selection ofa range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions.If equipped, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode 0 196.



Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

If equipped with a gasoline engineand an automatic transmission,Normal Mode Grade Braking isenabled when the vehicle is started,but is not enabled in RangeSelection Mode. It assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speedswhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. The first timethe system engages for eachignition key cycle, a DIC messagewill be displayed. See TransmissionMessages 0 133.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. When the button isreleased, the requested modechange is made. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages 0 133.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode 0 199 andCruise Control 0 211.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.



To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.

With an 8–speed automatictransmission, hold the plus/minusbuttons on the shift lever to selectthe highest or lowest rangeavailable for the current vehiclespeed.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the M,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in M (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number areavailable. As driving conditionschange, the transmission canautomatically shift to lower gears.For example, when M5 is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by thetransmission, but 6 (Sixth) cannot beused until the plus/minus button onthe shift lever is used to change tothe range.

In vehicles with gasoline engines,when the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating inwhen the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)determines if a downshift occurs.See the following chart.



6-Speed Automatic Transmission

Gear before shifting from D(Drive) to M (Manual Mode)

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting from D(Drive) to M (Manual Mode)

M4 M4 M3 M2 M2 M1

8-Speed Automatic Transmission

Gear beforeshifting from D(Drive) to M(Manual Mode)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toM (Manual Mode)– Tow/Haul notengaged

M6 M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M2 M1

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toM (Manual Mode)– Tow/Haulengaged

M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M3 M2 M1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 199.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

If the vehicle has an exhaust brake,it can also be used, but will notautomatically downshift thetransmission. See “Exhaust Brake”in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.



Low Traction Mode

If equipped, Low Traction Modeassists in vehicle acceleration whenroad conditions are slippery, suchas with ice or snow. While thevehicle is at a stop, select M2 usingRange Selection Mode. This willlimit torque to the wheels and helpto prevent the tires from spinning.

Tow/Haul Mode

The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode.The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling, providing increasedperformance, vehicle control, and

enhanced transmission and enginecooling when driving down steephills or mountain grades, towing,or hauling heavy loads.

The selector button is on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 118 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 173.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment 0 237.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode 0 196.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Brakingassists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

On vehicles with a gasoline engine,to disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. When the button isreleased, the requested modechange is made. A DIC message isdisplayed. See TransmissionMessages 0 133.

On vehicles with a diesel engine,Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking canbe enabled or disabled by pressingthe Tow/Haul Mode button. Use theexhaust brake and Tow/Haul Modefor maximum grade braking.

See Towing Equipment 0 237.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 193and Cruise Control 0 211.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel driveengages the front axle for extratraction. Read the appropriatesection for transfer case operationbefore using.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended periodof time. These conditions maycause premature wear on thevehicle’s powertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt inthe steering system.

. Cause tires to wear faster.

. Make the transfer case harder toshift, and cause it to run noisier.

{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake0 207.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in

4 n may damage or shorten thelife of the drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak® off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 208.

Electronic Transfer Case

Use the transfer case knob, next tothe steering wheel, to shift into andout of four-wheel drive for extratraction.

Indicator lights on the knob showwhich setting the transfer case is in.The N (Neutral) indicator is on theface of the knob. The indicator lightsdisplay briefly when the ignition isturned on, and one will stay on.If the lights display momentarilywhen the ignition is in ON/RUN, butnone stay on, the knob may havebeen turned while the vehicle wasoff. To see the indicator, turn the



knob to another position so that itmatches the actual transfer casesetting. If no lights display, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.An indicator light flashes whileshifting and until the shift iscomplete.

If the transfer case cannot completea requested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting. Turn the controlback to the previous setting to seethe indicator light.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Shift the transfer caseto N (Neutral) only when towing thevehicle. See Recreational VehicleTowing 0 331 or Towing the Vehicle0 331.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 n ifdriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.When engaged, keep vehicle speedbelow 72 km/h (45 mph).

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 208.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usewhen extra traction is needed. Thefront axle engages and helps whendriving on snowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.The vehicle can be shifted from 2 mto 4 m while the vehicle is moving.

Shifting Into 4 m

Turn the knob to 4 m at any speedup to 121 km/h (75 mph), exceptfrom 4 n. The indicator light will flashwhile shifting and will remain on theselected setting.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,except when shifting from 4 n.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, vehicle speedshould be kept below 72 km/h(45 mph).

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral). It isbest for the vehicle to bemoving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph).



2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob

to 4 m to see the indicator. With thevehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of 4 n

1. To shift out of 4 n the vehiclemust be stopped or movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph) withthe transmission in N (Neutral)and the ignition in ON/RUN.It is best for the vehicle to bemoving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m or 2 m.Wait for the 4 m or 2 m indicatorlight to stop flashing beforeshifting the transmissioninto gear.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 m or 2 m indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds, but will not completethe shift. With the vehicle movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift to N (Neutral):

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake andpress and hold the brakepedal. See Parking Brake0 207.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.

6. Turn the transfer case knobclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowlyrelease the dial to the 4 nposition. The N (Neutral) lightwill come on when the transfercase shift to N (Neutral) iscomplete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse),then shift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).

10. See Recreational VehicleTowing 0 331.




Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Set the parking brake andapply the brake pedal.



4. Turn the transfer case knob to2 m.After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

Caution


6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to thedesired gear.

Automatic Transfer Case

Use the transfer case knob next tothe steering wheel to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

Indicator lights display which settingthe transfer case is in. N (Neutral) isindicated on the face of the knob.The indicator lights will displaybriefly when the ignition is turned onand one will stay on. If the lightsdisplay momentarily when theignition is in ON/RUN, but none stayon, the knob may have been turnedwhile the vehicle was off. To see theindicator, turn the knob to anotherposition so that it matches the

actual transfer case setting. If nolights display, take the vehicle toyour dealer for service. An indicatorlight flashes while shifting thetransfer case and remainsilluminated when the shift iscomplete.

If the transfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting. Turn the knobback to the previous transfer casesetting to see the indicator.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 331or Towing the Vehicle 0 331.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable.When driving in AUTO, the frontaxle is engaged, and the vehicle's



power is sent to the front and rearwheels automatically based ondriving conditions. This settingprovides slightly lower fuel economythan 2 m.Do not use AUTO mode to park ona steep grade with poor tractionsuch as ice, snow, mud or gravel. InAUTO mode only the rear wheelswill hold the vehicle from slidingwhen parked. If parking on a steepgrade, use 4 m to keep all fourwheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, off-roading,or plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 nwhen driving off-road in deep sand,deep mud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 208.

Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from 4n. The indicator light will flash whileshifting and will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

To shift to 4 n:1. The ignition must be in ON/

RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than5 km/h (3 mph) with the

transmission in N (Neutral). It isbest for the vehicle to bemoving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution


If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob

to 4 m to display the indicator. Withthe vehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.



Shifting Out of 4 n

To shift out of 4 n:1. The vehicle must be stopped or

moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmissionin N (Neutral) and the ignition inON/RUN. It is best for thevehicle to be moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution


If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph),and the transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake andpress and hold the brakepedal. See Parking Brake0 207.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.


5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.

6. Turn the transfer case knobclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowlyrelease the dial to the 4 nposition. The N (Neutral) lightwill come on when the transfercase shift to N (Neutral) iscomplete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse),then shift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).

10. See Recreational VehicleTowing 0 331.




Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift:

1. Set the parking brake andapply the brake pedal.



4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.


6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to thedesired gear.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 117.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light0 116.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brake

system warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 228.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal as



the driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a grade. Thisfeature is designed to prevent thevehicle from rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.After you completely stop and holdthe vehicle in a complete standstillon a grade, HSA will automaticallyactivate. During the transition periodbetween when you release thebrake pedal and start to accelerateto drive off on a grade, HSA holdsthe braking pressure for a maximumof two seconds to ensure that thereis no rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, HSA may also apply

the trailer brakes. It will not activateif the vehicle is in a drive gear andfacing downhill or if the vehicle isfacing uphill and in R (Reverse).There may be situations on minorhills (less than 5% grade) with aloaded vehicle or while pulling atrailer where HSA may activate.

If you release the brake pedal andthen reapply the brake pedal whileHSA is activated, the brake pedaltypically feels firmer with less pedaltravel.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on the



intended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 246.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 175and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

When the transfer case (if equipped)is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, thestability system is automatically

disabled, g comes on, and theappropriate message will appear onthe DIC. Both traction control andStabiliTrak are automaticallydisabled in this condition.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver in

maintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the center stack.



Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate messagewill display in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages 0 130. Toturn TCS on again, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the traction off light i and the

StabiliTrak OFF light g come onand stay on in the instrument

cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages 0 130.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the gbutton. The traction off light i and

the StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature. SeeTrailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 246 orHill Start Assist (HSA) 0 208.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 252.

Hill DescentControl (HDC)If equipped, HDC can be used whendriving downhill. It sets andmaintains vehicle speed whiledescending a very steep incline in aforward or reverse gear.

The HDC switch is on the centerstack, below the climate controls.

Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.Vehicle speed must be below50 km/h (31 mph).

The HDC light displays on theinstrument cluster when enabled.

HDC can maintain vehicle speedsbetween 3 and 22 km/h (2 and14 mph) on an incline greater thanor equal to a 10% grade. A blinkingHDC light indicates the system isactively applying the brakes tomaintain vehicle speed.



When HDC is activated, the initialHDC speed is set to the currentdriving speed. It can be increased ordecreased by pressing the +RES orSET- steering wheel controls or byapplying the accelerator or brakepedal. This adjusted speedbecomes the new set speed.

HDC will remain enabled between22 and 60 km/h (14 and 37 mph);however vehicle speed cannot beset or maintained in this range.It will automatically disable if thevehicle speed is above 80 km/h(50 mph) or above 60 km/h(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds. 5must be pressed again tore-enable HDC.

When enabled, if the vehicle is at aspeed above 22 km/h (14 mph) andless than 60 km/h (37 mph), a DICmessage will display. See VehicleSpeed Messages 0 136.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more can bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with an Allison orHydra-Matic 6-speed automatictransmission, see “Tow/Haul ModeGrade Braking” under Tow/HaulMode 0 199 for an explanation of



how cruise control interacts with theRange Selection Mode, Tow/HaulMode, and Grade Braking systems.

If the cruise control is being usedand the Traction Control System(TCS) or StabiliTrak begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 208. If a collision alertoccurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System 0 218. Whenroad conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, cruise control can beturned back on.

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol disengages.

5 (On/Off) : Press to turn thesystem on or off. A white indicatorcomes on in the instrument clusterwhen cruise control is on and turnsoff when cruise control is off.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate) : Ifthere is a set speed in memory,press briefly to resume to thatspeed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− (Set/Coast) : Press briefly toset the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehiclespeed.

* (Cancel) : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If5 is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep 5off when cruise is not being used.

1. Press5 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. SeeInstrumentCluster 0 106.



Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button briefly. Thevehicle returns to the previous setspeed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold the +RES buttonuntil the desired speed isreached, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressthe +RES button. For eachpress, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 106.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold the SET– buttonuntil the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, briefly press theSET– button. For each press,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 106.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing the SET– button will resultin cruise control set to the currentvehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed.



While going downhill:

. Vehicles with a 6-speedautomatic transmission and agasoline engine have CruiseGrade Braking to help maintaindriver selected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range SelectionMode. It assists in maintainingdriver selected speed whendriving on downhill grades byusing the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.

To disable and enable CruiseGrade Braking for the currentignition key cycle, press andhold the Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages 0 133.

. Vehicles with a diesel enginehave Cruise Grade Brakingenabled when Tow/Haul Mode ison, the exhaust brake is on,or both are on.

For other forms of descent control,see Hill Descent Control (HDC)0 210, Automatic Transmission0 193, and Tow/Haul Mode 0 199.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor the ignition is turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Driving0 165.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitoredby the system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide youwith enough time to avoid acrash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization0 136.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),and Front Parking Assist (FPA) mayhelp the driver park or avoid objects.Always check around the vehiclewhen parking or backing.

The RVC and RPA will not workproperly if the tailgate is down. If thetailgate is down, do not use thesesystems.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the center stack display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press abutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of 8 km/h (5 mph).

1. View Displayed by theCamera



1. View Displayed by theCamera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display onthe RVC screen to show that RPAhas detected an object. This trianglechanges from amber to red andincreases in size the closer theobject.

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Parking Assist

With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,as the vehicle moves at speeds ofless than 8 km/h (5 mph) thesensors on the bumpers may detectobjects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehiclewithin a zone 25 cm (10 in) high offthe ground and below bumper level.These detection distances may beshorter during warmer or humid

weather. Blocked sensors will notdetect objects and can also causefalse detections. Keep the sensorsclean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, andslush; and clean sensors after a carwash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.



The instrument cluster may have aparking assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for RPA, and onsome vehicles, for FPA. As theobject gets closer, more bars lightup and the bars change color fromyellow to amber to red.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),a continuous beep will sound fromthe front or rear, or both sides of the

Safety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for FPA are higherpitched than for RPA.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button on the center stackis used to turn on or off the Frontand Rear Parking Assist. Theindicator light in the button comeson when the features are on andturns off when the features havebeen disabled.

Front and Rear Parking Assist canbe turned off, on, or on with towbarthrough vehicle personalization. See“Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization 0 136. If the parkingassist is turned off through vehiclepersonalization, the parking assistbutton on the center stack will bedisabled. To turn the parking assiston again, select On in the vehiclepersonalization menu. The On with

Towbar setting allows for theparking assist to work properly witha small item attached to the trailerhitch. Turn off parking assist whentowing a trailer.

To turn the rear parking assistsymbols or guidance lines on or off,see “Rear Camera” under VehiclePersonalization 0 136.

Disconnecting the Rear VisionCamera (RVC)

The RVC must be disconnected ifthe tailgate needs to be removed.

The RVC is disconnected byremoving the connector from theelectrical junction block mounted onthe left side of the cross member ofthe vehicle frame. Afterdisconnecting, the cap mountednext to the camera connector mustbe relocated so that the openterminals on the junction block arecovered.



Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle in a forward gear, ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), LaneDeparture Warning (LDW), and/orLane Keep Assist (LKA) can help toavoid a crash or reduce crashdamage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving 0 165.

FCA can be disabled with the FCAsteering wheel control.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driver

braking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedalas needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The FCA control is on the steeringwheel. Press[ to set the FCAtiming to Far, Medium, Near, or Off.The first button press shows thecurrent setting on the DIC.Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehiclespeed. The faster the vehicle speed,the farther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alert



timing. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield in front ofthe rearview mirror, and cleaning thefront of the vehicle where radarsensors are located, may correctthe issue.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) (2500/3500 Series)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide an alert ifthe vehicle is crossing a lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. LDW uses a

camera sensor to detect the lanemarkings at speeds of 56 km/h(35 mph) or greater.

{ Warning

The LDW system does not steerthe vehicle. The LDW systemmay not:

. Provide enough time toavoid a crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice; if they arenot in proper condition; or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you when

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

departing the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarking. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LDW inbad weather conditions.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack. The controlindicator will light when LDW is on.



When LDW is on, @ is green ifLDW is available to warn of a lanedeparture. If the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking without usingthe turn signal in that direction, @changes to amber and flashes.Additionally, there will be threebeeps, or the driver seat will pulsethree times on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system may not detect lanes aswell when there are:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

If the LDW system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

LDW alerts may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LDW off if theseconditions continue.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)(1500 Series)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are activelysteering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses a

camera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if alane marking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid alane departure or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice, if they arenot in proper condition, or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it willonly assist or provide an LDWalert when approaching the laneon the side where it has detecteda lane marking. Even with LKAand LDW, you must steer thevehicle. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA inbad weather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a traileror on slippery roads could causeloss of control of the vehicle anda crash. Turn the system off.

How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the center stack.

When on,A is green if LKA isavailable to assist and provide LDWalerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel anddisplayA as amber if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using a turn signal in that

direction. It may also provide anLDW alert by flashingA amberas the lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there will be threebeeps, or the driver seat will pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.If LKA does not detect active driversteering, an alert and chime may beprovided. Move the steering wheelto dismiss.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.



If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks,shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.

FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

Use of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or FlexFuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel 0 225.

For all vehicles except those withthe 6.2L V8 engine, use regularunleaded gasoline meeting ASTMspecification D4814 with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. Do notuse gasoline with an octane ratingbelow 87, as it may cause enginedamage and will lower fueleconomy.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code J), use premiumunleaded gasoline meeting ASTMspecification D4814 with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher.Regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher can be used,but acceleration and fuel economywill be reduced, and an audibleknocking noise may be heard. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at91 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 91 octane rating orhigher, the engine needs service.



Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels that

meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 115.If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer for diagnosis. If itis determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any other



fuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 223.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Fuel 0 223.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuels website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

For the 6.0L V8 engine, afterrefueling, the vehicle calculates thecomposition of the fuel. It is notrecommended to repeatedly switchbetween fuels. If fuels are switchedfrequently, add as much fuel aspossible and do not add less than11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Drive atleast 11 km (7 mi) immediately after

refueling to allow the vehicle toadapt to the change in ethanolconcentration.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank 0 226.

Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.



Filling the TankIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop, then unscrew thecap all the way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle. Vehicles that have aFlexFuel badge and a yellow fuelcap can use either unleadedgasoline or ethanol fuel containingup to 85% ethanol (E85). See E85or FlexFuel 0 225.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

If the vehicle is a dual fuel tankchassis cab model, and it runs outof fuel, refuel the front fuel tank firstto ensure a quick restart.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.



Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 335.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 115.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Fuel SystemMessages 0 129 for moreinformation.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 115.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 331. Fortowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 331.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that apply totrailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 192.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has

electric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to the

right, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.



Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 199.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a few

minutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comeson, see Engine Overheating 0 270.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.


5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 346.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, and



brake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

If the vehicle is bi-fuel, see thebi-fuel supplement.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See New Vehicle Break-In 0 184 formore information.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell or even at all. The driver andpassengers could be seriously

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

See Vehicle Load Limits 0 176 formore information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” later in thissection.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend onany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongue



weight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Trailer weight rating (TWR) forpickup models is calculatedassuming the tow vehicle has thedriver, a front seat passenger, andall required trailering equipment.Weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the trailer weightrating.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

For kingpin weight and trailertongue weight information, see“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.

Weights listed apply forconventional trailers and fifth-wheeltrailers unless otherwise noted.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box

5.3LV8 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.23 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)

5.3LV8 3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.23 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)


5.3LV8 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.23 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)

5.3LV8 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.23 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)


6.0LV8 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb)

6.0LV8 – Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)

6.0LV8 – Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 486 kg (14,300 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)


6.0LV8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb)







6.0LV8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb)


6.0LV8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)

3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 354 kg (9,700 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb)


6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb)



6.0LV8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb)



3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box


6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Conventional Trailer

4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)






(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.(b) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers and cargo in the vehiclereduce the amount of tongue weightthe vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow.

Trailer tongue weight (1) should be10–15% and fifth-wheel orgooseneck kingpin weight should be15–25% of the loaded trailerweight (2) up to the maximums forvehicle series and hitch type.



Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight-Carrying 363 kg (800 lb)

1500 Weight-Distributing 544 kg (1,200 lb)

2500/3500Standard Box

Weight-Carrying orWeight-Distributing

680 kg (1,500 lb)

2500/3500 Long Box

Weight-Carrying orWeight-Distributing

907 kg (2,000 lb)

2500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 361 kg (3,000 lb)

3500 Single RearWheels

Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 814 kg (4,000 lb)

3500 Dual RearWheels

Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 2 495 kg (5,500 lb)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceed

the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). See “TotalWeight on the Vehicle's Tires” laterin this section.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more thanhalf of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification/Tire labelon the center pillar or see VehicleLoad Limits 0 176. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, make surenot to exceed the RGAWR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.



Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer doesnot exceed any of its weight ratings— GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, TrailerWeight Rating, or Tongue Weight.The only way to be sure it is notexceeding any of these ratings is toweigh the tow vehicle and trailercombination, fully loaded for the trip,getting individual weights for each ofthese items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Manytrailers can be towed with aweight-carrying hitch which simplyfeatures a coupler latched to thehitch ball, or a tow eye latched to apintle hook. Other trailers mayrequire a weight-distributing hitchthat uses spring bars to distributethe trailer tongue weight among thetow vehicle and trailer axles.Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitchesmay also be used. See “Weight of

the Trailer Tongue” under TrailerTowing 0 231 for rating limits withvarious hitch types.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damaged insharp turns. Make sure thereis ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and thebumper.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing Hitch andAdjustment

A weight-distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight-distributing hitch shouldbe used.



Vehicle Series Trailer WeightWeight-Distributing Hitch

Usage Hitch Distribution

1500 Up to 3175 kg (7,000 lb) Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

1500 Over 3175 kg (7,000 lb) Required 50%

2500/3500 Up to 8165 kg (18,000 lb) Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure distance (2) beforecoupling the trailer to the hitch ball.Measure the height again after thetrailer is coupled and adjust thespring bars so the distance (2) is asclose as possible to halfwaybetween the two measurements.

Fifth-Wheel and GooseneckTrailering

Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailerscan be used with many pickupmodels. These trailers place alarger percentage of the weight(kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle

than conventional trailers. Makesure this weight does not cause thevehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.

Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpinweight should be 15 to 25% of thetrailer weight up to the maximumamount specified in the traileringchart for the vehicle. See “Weight ofthe Trailer” under Trailer Towing0 231.

The hitch should be located in thepickup bed so that its centerline isover or slightly in front of the rearaxle. Take care that it is not so farforward that it will contact the backof the cab in sharp turns. This isespecially important for short box



pickups. Trailer pin box extensionsand sliding fifth-wheel hitchassemblies can help this condition.There should be at least 15 cm (6 in)of clearance between the top of thepickup box and the bottom of thetrailer shelf that extends overthe box.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lb) with a factory-installedstep bumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper; otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Alwaysleave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lb) needs to haveits own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Do not tap into the vehicle'shydraulic brake system.

Auxiliary Battery

The auxiliary battery provision canbe used to supply electrical powerto additional equipment that may beadded, such as a slide-in camper.If equipped, this relay will be on thedriver side of the vehicle, next to theunderhood electrical center.

Be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withany electrical equipment that isinstalled.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended periods will drain thebattery. Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not use equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperagerating of 30 amps for the auxiliarybattery provision.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The vehicle is equipped with one ofthe following wiring harnesses fortowing a trailer or hauling a slide-incamper.

Basic Trailer Wiring

All regular, double cab, and crewcab pickups have a seven-wiretrailer towing harness.

For vehicles not equipped withheavy-duty trailering, the harness issecured to the vehicle's framebehind the spare tire mount. Theharness requires the installation of atrailer connector, which is availablethrough your dealer.



Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage

For vehicles equipped withheavy-duty trailering, the harnessconnector is mounted in the bumper.

For vehicles with the 5th wheel/gooseneck trailer package, theharness connector is mounted onthe inside of the pickup bed behindthe rear wheel.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

. Green/Violet: Left Stop/TurnSignal

. Yellow/Gray: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/ParkingLamps

. White: Ground

. White/Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red/Green: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul Modebutton, if equipped, at the end of theshift lever. This will boost thevehicle system voltage and properlycharge the battery. If the trailer istoo light for Tow/Haul Mode, or thevehicle is not equipped with Tow/Haul, turn on the headlamps as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer WiringPackage

For vehicles without the 5th wheel/gooseneck tralier package,seven-wire camper harness is underthe rear bumper, attached to theframe near the rear crossmember.A connector must be added to thewiring harness that connects to thecamper.

The harness contains the followingcamper/trailer circuits:

. Green/Violet: Left Stop/TurnSignal



. Yellow/Gray: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/ParkingLamps

. White: Ground

. White/Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red/Green: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If the vehicle is equipped with theheavy-duty trailering option, see“Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage” earlier in this section.

When the camper-wiring harness isordered without the heavy-dutytrailering package, a seven-wireharness with a seven-pin connectoris at the rear of the vehicle and istied to the vehicle's frame.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off theTow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode 0 199.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75% of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing 0 231. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the followingdriving conditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.



Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor use with electric trailer brakes ormost electric over hydraulic trailerbrakes.

This symbol is on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with anITBC system. The power output tothe trailer brakes is based on theamount of brake pressure beingapplied by the vehicle’s brakesystem, and on the type of trailerbrakes detected. This availablepower output to the trailer brakescan be adjusted to a wide range oftrailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,and StabiliTrak systems. In traileringconditions that cause the vehicle’santilock brake or StabiliTraksystems to activate, power sent tothe trailer's brakes will beautomatically adjusted to minimizetrailer wheel lock-up. This does notimply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.

If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,or StabiliTrak systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Make sureall of these systems are fullyoperational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. TheITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in ON/RUN.

{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has anair brake system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking. There may be anincrease in stopping distance ortrailer instability which couldresult in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle, trailer,or other property. Use the ITBCsystem only with electric orelectric over hydraulic trailerbrakes.



Trailer Brake Control Panel

1. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

2. Trailer Gain AdjustmentButtons

The ITBC system has a controlpanel on the instrument panel to theleft of the steering column. SeeInstrument Panel 0 6. The controlpanel allows adjustment to theamount of output, referred to asTrailer Gain, available to the trailerbrakes and allows manualapplication of the trailer brakes. TheTrailer Brake Control Panel is usedalong with the Trailer Brake Display

Page on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) to adjust and displaypower output to the trailer brakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC system displaysmessages in the DIC.

The display page indicates TrailerGain setting, power output to thetrailer brakes, trailer connection, andsystem operational status.

To display the Trailer Brake DisplayPage, do any of the following:

. Scroll through the DIC menupages.

. Press a Trailer Gain button.If the Trailer Brake Display Pageis not currently displayed, pressa Trailer Gain button to recall thecurrent Trailer Gain setting.Each press and release of thegain buttons will then change theTrailer Gain setting.

. Activate the Manual TrailerBrake Apply Lever.

TRAILER GAIN: This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

To adjust the Trailer Gain, press oneof the Trailer Gain Adjustmentbuttons. Press and hold a gainbutton to continuously adjust theTrailer Gain. To turn the output tothe trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gainsetting to 0.0 (zero).

TRAILER OUTPUT: This displaysanytime a trailer with electric brakesis connected. Output to the trailerbrakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relativeto the Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 100% for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate “- - -- - -” on the Trailer Brake DisplayPage whenever the following occur:

. No trailer is connected.

. A trailer without electric brakesis connected (no DIC messagewill display).

. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).



. There is a fault present in thewiring to the trailer brakes (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).

. The ITBC system is not workingdue to a fault (a SERVICETRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage will also display inthe DIC).

Manual Trailer Brake Apply

The Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever is used to apply the trailer’selectric brakes independent of thevehicle’s brakes. Sliding the lever tothe left will apply only the trailerbrakes. Use this lever to adjustTrailer Gain to properly adjust thepower output to the trailer brakes.

The trailer's and the vehicle's brakelamps will come on when eithervehicle brakes or manual trailerbrakes are applied.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and mustbe adjusted anytime vehicle loading,trailer loading, or road surfaceconditions change.

{ Warning

Trailer brakes that areover-gained or under-gained maynot stop the vehicle and the traileras intended and can result in acrash. Always follow theinstructions to set the Trailer Gainfor the proper trailer stoppingperformance.

Use the following to adjust TrailerGain for each towing condition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level roadsurface representative of thetowing condition and free oftraffic at about 32 to 40 km/h(20 to 25 mph) and fully applythe Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever.

Adjusting Trailer Gain atspeeds lower than 32 to40 km/h (20 to 25 mph) mayresult in an incorrect gainsetting.

2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, usingthe Trailer Gain AdjustmentButtons, to just below the pointof trailer wheel lock-up,indicated by trailer wheelsqueal or tire smoke when atrailer wheel locks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. In this case, adjust theTrailer Gain to the highestallowable setting for the towingcondition.

3. Readjust Trailer Gain anytimevehicle loading, trailer loading,or road surface conditionschange or if trailer wheellock-up is noticed at any timewhile towing.



Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

In addition to displaying TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT through theDIC, trailer connection and ITBCsystem status are displayed onthe DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will briefly display when atrailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. This messagecan be acknowledged before itautomatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will display if:

. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the trailer brakes. Thismessage will continue as longas there is an electrical fault inthe trailer wiring. This messagewill also turn off if it isacknowledged.

To determine if the electrical fault ison the vehicle side or trailer side ofthe trailer wiring harnessconnection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition off.

3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILERWIRING message reappears,the electrical fault is on thevehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILERWIRING message onlyreappears when connecting thetrailer wiring harness to thevehicle, the electrical fault is onthe trailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will displaywhen there is a problem with theITBC system. If this messagecontinues over multiple ignitioncycles, there is a problem with theITBC system. Have the vehicleserviced.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message displayswhile driving, the ITBC system maynot be fully functional or may notfunction at all. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.



A GM dealer may be able todiagnose and repair problems withthe trailer. However, any diagnosisand repair of the trailer is notcovered under the vehicle warranty.Contact your trailer dealer forassistance with trailer repairs andtrailer warranty information.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTSC feature. Trailer sway isunintended side-to-side motion of atrailer while being towed. If thevehicle is towing a trailer and theTSC detects that sway is increasing,the vehicle brakes are selectivelyapplied at each wheel, to helpreduce excessive trailer sway. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, and the trailer hasthe electric actuated brake system,StabiliTrak may also apply the trailerbrakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakwarning light will flash on the

instrument cluster. Vehicle speedmust be reduced. If trailer swaycontinues, StabiliTrak can reduceengine torque to help slow thevehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 208.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC, trailer sway could resultin loss of control and the vehiclecould crash. If excessive trailersway is detected, slow down to asafe speed. Check the trailer andvehicle to help correct possiblecauses. These could include animproperly or overloaded trailer,unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration,excessive vehicle-trailer speed,or improperly inflated or incorrectvehicle or trailer tires. See TowingEquipment 0 237 for trailer ratingsand hitch setuprecommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 252.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 115.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 71 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 72.

For information on wiring auxiliaryswitches, see www.gmupfitter.comor contact your dealer.

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment

Caution

Do not exceed 64 km/h (40 mph)with a snow plow mounted to thevehicle. The vehicle couldoverheat and be damaged.

Before installing a snow plow on thevehicle, here are some things youneed to know:

Caution

If the vehicle does not have thesnow plow prep package, addinga plow can damage the vehicle,and the repairs would not becovered by warranty. Unless thevehicle was built to carry a snowplow, do not add one to thevehicle. If the vehicle has thesnow plow prep package, calledRPO VYU, then the payload thevehicle can carry will be reduced

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

when a snow plow is installed.The vehicle can be damaged ifeither the front or rear axle ratingsor the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) are exceeded.

Some vehicles are built with aspecial snow plow prep package,called RPO VYU. If the vehicle hasthis option, you can add a plow to it,provided certain weights, such asthe weights on the vehicle's axlesand the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), are not exceeded.

The plow the vehicle can carrydepends on many things, such as:

. The options the vehicle camewith, and the weight of thoseoptions.

. The weight and number ofpassengers intended to becarried.

. The weight of items added to thevehicle, like a tool box ortruck cap.

. The total weight of anyadditional cargo intended to becarried.

Say, for example, you have a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow. The total weightof all occupants and cargo insidethe cab should not exceed 135 kg(300 lb). This means that you mayonly be able to carry one passenger.But, even this may be too much ifthere is other equipment alreadyadding to the weight of the vehicle.

Here are some guidelines for safelycarrying a snow plow on the vehicle:

. Make sure the weight on thefront and rear axles does notexceed the axle rating for each.

. For the front axle, if more cargoor passengers must be carried,appropriate counter ballast mustbe installed rear of the rear axle.Counter ballast must be properlysecured so it will not moveduring driving.

. Follow the snow plowmanufacturer'srecommendations regarding rearballast. Rear ballast may be

required to ensure a proper frontand rear weight distribution ratio,even though the actual weight atthe front axle may be less thanthe front axle rating.

. The snow plow manufacturer orinstaller can assist you indetermining the amount of rearballast required, to help makesure the snow plow/vehiclecombination does not exceedthe GVW rating, the front andrear axle ratings, and the frontand rear weight distribution ratio.

. The total vehicle must notexceed the GVW rating.

Front axle reserve capacity is thedifference between the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) and the frontaxle weight of the vehicle with fullfuel and passengers. Basically, it isthe amount of weight that can beadded to the front axle beforereaching the front GAWR.



United States

Canada

The front axle reserve capacity forthe vehicle can be found in thelower right corner of theCertification/Tire label, as shown.

In order to calculate the amount ofweight any front accessory, such asa snow plow, is adding to the frontaxle, use the following formula:

(W x (A +W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight theaccessory is adding to thefront axle.

Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessoryis in front of the front axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

For example, adding a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow actually addsmore than 318 kg (700 lb) to thefront axle. Using the formula, if thesnow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front ofthe front axle and the wheel base is305 cm (10 ft), then:

W = 318 kg (700 lb)A = 122 cm (4 ft)W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)

(W x (A +W.B.)/W.B. =(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg(980 lb)

So, if the front axle reserve capacityis more than 445 kg (980 lb), thesnow plow could be added withoutexceeding the front GAWR.

Heavier equipment can be added onthe front of the vehicle if it iscompensated for by carrying fewerpassengers or less cargo, or bypositioning cargo toward the rear.This has the effect of reducing theload on the front. However, the frontGAWR, rear GAWR, and GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) mustnever be exceeded.



{ Warning

On some vehicles that havecertain front mounted equipment,such as a snow plow, it may bepossible to load the front axle tothe front gross axle weight rating(GAWR) but not have enoughweight on the rear axle to haveproper braking performance. If thebrakes cannot work properly, youcould have a crash. To help thebrakes work properly when asnow plow is installed, alwaysfollow the snow plowmanufacturer or installer'srecommendation for rear ballastto ensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio, eventhough the actual front weightmay be less than the frontGAWR, and the total vehicleweight is less than the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR).Maintaining a proper front andrear weight distribution ratio isnecessary to provide properbraking performance.

Total vehicle reserve capacity is thedifference between the GVWR andthe weight of the truck with full fueland passengers. It is the amount ofweight that can be added to thevehicle before reaching the GVWR.Keep in mind that reserve capacitynumbers are intended as a guidewhen selecting the amount ofequipment or cargo the truck cancarry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,rear, or total weight, go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle. Yourdealer can also help with this.

The total vehicle reserve capacityfor the vehicle can be found in thelower right corner of theCertification/Tire label as shownpreviously.

See your dealer for additionaladvice and information about usinga snow plow on the vehicle. Also,see Vehicle Load Limits 0 176.

Emergency Roof LampProvisions

Vehicles with the RPO VYU snowplow prep package also have anemergency roof lamp provisionpackage, RPO TRW. Wiring for theemergency roof lamp is providedabove the overhead console. SeeAuxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp 0 151for switch location.

Pickup Conversion toChassis CabWe are aware that some vehicleowners might consider having thepickup box removed and acommercial or recreational bodyinstalled. Owners should be awarethat, as manufactured, there aredifferences between a chassis caband a pickup with the box removedwhich could affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapta pickup to permit its safe use witha specialized body should beinstalled by the body builder.


Vehicle Care 251

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 252California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 252

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 261Automatic Transmission Fluid(6 Speed Transmission) . . . . . 261

Automatic Transmission Fluid(8 Speed Transmission) . . . . . 264

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 265Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 270Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Power Steering Fluid (1500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Battery - North America . . . . . . 277Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 280Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 281Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 282

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 282Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 283

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 284Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 294Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302


252 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 313Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 325

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 331Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningWARNING: Most motor vehicles,including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive

harm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals.

See Battery - North America 0 277and Jump Starting - North America0 326.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as


Vehicle Care 253

airbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 72.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 372.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 71.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 358.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.


254 Vehicle Care

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hoodrelease. The handle is underthe front edge of the hood nearthe center. Push the handle tothe right and at the same timeraise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


Vehicle Care 255

Engine Compartment Overview

5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2L V8 Engine Similar


256 Vehicle Care

1. Positive (+) Terminal. SeeJump Starting - North America0 326.

2. Battery - North America 0 277.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 266.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 265.

5. Automatic TransmissionDipstick (If Equipped). See“How to Check the AutomaticTransmission Fluid” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid(6 Speed Transmission) 0 261or Automatic TransmissionFluid (8 Speed Transmission)0 264.

6. Remote Negative (-) Location.See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 326.

7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 266.

8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 258.

9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 258.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 274.

11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 275.

12. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 285.


Vehicle Care 257

6.0L V8 Engine


258 Vehicle Care

1. Positive (+) Terminal. SeeJump Starting - North America0 326.

2. Battery - North America 0 277.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 266.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 265.

5. Automatic TransmissionDipstick. See “How to Checkthe Automatic TransmissionFluid” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6 SpeedTransmission) 0 261 orAutomatic Transmission Fluid(8 Speed Transmission) 0 264.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 258.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 258.

8. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 266.

9. Remote Negative (–) Location.See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 326.

10. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid (1500 Series) 0 273 orPower Steering Fluid (2500/3500 Series) 0 273.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 274.

12. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 275.

13. Auxiliary Battery (If Equipped).See Battery - North America0 277.

14. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 285.

If the vehicle has a diesel engineand/or an Allison Transmission, seethe Duramax diesel supplement.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 261.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.


Vehicle Care 259

See Engine Compartment Overview0 255 for the location of the engineoil dipstick.

If a low oil message displays on theDIC, it is important to park on levelground to accurately measure theoil level on the dipstick. Idling thevehicle on steep grades for a longtime can influence the level sensingaccuracy.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel orcloth, then push it back in allthe way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 360.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 255 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


260 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity grade forthe 5.3L and 6.2L V8 engines. UseSAE 5W-30 viscosity grade for the6.0L V8 engine.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused in the 6.0L engine. An oil ofthis viscosity grade will provideeasier cold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


Vehicle Care 261

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, aCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes on to indicate thatan oil change is necessary. SeeEngine Oil Messages 0 128.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem may indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system must

be reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the engine oil life system:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 123.

2. Press and hold V. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press the acceleratorpedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. If the displayshows 100%, the system isreset.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started and/or theREMAINING OIL LIFE is near 0%,the engine oil life system has notbeen reset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6 SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheated


262 Vehicle Care

transmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to adealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 346. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaustsystem parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading ifchecking the transmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface.Keep the engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about

three seconds in each range.Then, move the shift lever backto P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500–800 rpm) for at leastone minute. Slowly release thebrake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andcheck the transmission fluidtemperature on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 123.

6. Using the transmission fluidtemperature reading, determineand perform the appropriatecheck procedure. If thetransmission fluid temperaturereading is not within therequired temperature ranges,allow the vehicle to cool,or operate the vehicle until theappropriate transmission fluidtemperature is reached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to be


Vehicle Care 263

operated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluidlevel. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure tocheck fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27 °C and 32 °C (80 °F and90 °F).

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 255.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of thedipstick and read the lowerlevel. Repeat the checkprocedure to verify the reading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the firstopportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71 °C to 93 °C (160 °F to200 °F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °Fand 200 °F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed atthe first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level risesas fluid temperature increases, so itis important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.


264 Vehicle Care

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 255.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of thedipstick and read the lowerlevel. Repeat the checkprocedure to verify the reading.

5. Safe operating level is withinthe HOT cross hatch band onthe dipstick. If the fluid level isnot within the HOT band, and

the transmission temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C(160 °F and 200 °F), add ordrain fluid as necessary tobring the level into the HOTband. If the fluid level is low,add only enough fluid to bringthe level into the HOT band.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt).Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (8 SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is notequipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information0 372.


Vehicle Care 265

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 346. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Pickup Models” under “EngineAir Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramaxdiesel supplement for the correctinspection and replacementprocedures.

The engine air cleaner/filter is nearthe center of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 255.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air filter, seeMaintenance Schedule 0 346.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine aircleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Screws2. Electrical Connectors3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 255.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air ductclamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnectors (2) and theconnector harness from thecover.


266 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

7. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemIf the vehicle has the Duramax®

diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for moreinformation.

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2LV8 Engine Similar

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out

of View)


Vehicle Care 267

6.0L V8 Engine

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out

of View)

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 270.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get the

(Continued)


268 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

overheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 255.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.


Vehicle Care 269

5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2LV8 Engine Similar

6.0L V8 Engine

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, there may be a leak in thecooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Cooling System” in theDuramax diesel supplement for theproper coolant fill procedure.

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.


270 Vehicle Care

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant.

Light-DutyCoolant Surge

TankPressure Cap

Heavy-DutyCoolant Surge

TankPressure Cap

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90 °C (195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches theFULL COLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure captightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1-6.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has the Duramaxdiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge in the vehicle's instrumentcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 110.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeEngine Cooling System Messages0 128 and Engine Power Messages0 129.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 367.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.


Vehicle Care 271

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode 0 272for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

steam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode 0 272for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

message, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 231.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.


272 Vehicle Care

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with anengine driven cooling fan, pushdown the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while the vehicle isparked. If the warning is still there,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until it

cools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”following.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message displays, anoverheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps to prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows thevehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Driving extendeddistances and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

Caution

After driving in the overheatedengine protection operatingmode, the engine oil will be

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

severely degraded. Any repairsperformed before the engine iscool may cause engine damage.Allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. Repair thecause of coolant loss, change theoil, and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil 0 258.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan, when the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or making


Vehicle Care 273

extra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch disengages.

This fan noise may also be heardwhen starting the engine. It will goaway as the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

If the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fansmay run after the engine has beenturned. off. This is normal and noservice is required.

Power Steering Fluid(1500 Series)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(2500/3500 Series)

See Engine Compartment Overview0 255 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

Wait for the power steering systemto cool, with the engine off, beforechecking the fluid.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap andcompletely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be between theADD and FULL marks. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the hashed area betweenthe ADD and FULL marks.


274 Vehicle Care

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355. Always use theproper fluid.

Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 255 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion if

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 275

Caution (Continued)

freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications 0 360.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 255 for the location of thereservoir.


276 Vehicle Care

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 116.

Brake fluid absorbs water over time.Replace brake fluid at the specifiedintervals to prevent increasedstopping distance. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 346.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 255.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 355.


Vehicle Care 277

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 255 for battery location.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 252.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 326 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 346 to determine when to checkthe lubricant.


278 Vehicle Care

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 346 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

How to Check Lubricant


1500 Series

1. Fill Plug

2. Drain Plug

All Except 1500 Series

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

. When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fillplug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.


Vehicle Care 279

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveledout along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading taken

five minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. The rear axle assembly mustbe supported on a flat, level surfaceto get a true reading.

How to Check Lubricant

2500HD with 6.0L

All Other Series and Engines


. For 5.3L 1500 Seriesapplications, the proper level is1.0 mm to 19.0 mm (0.04 in to0.7 in) below the bottom of thefill hole, located on the rear axle.Add only enough fluid to reachthe proper level.

. For 6.2L 1500 Seriesapplications, the proper level isfrom 15 mm to 40 mm (0.6 in to1.6 in) below the bottom of the


280 Vehicle Care

fill plug hole, located on the rearaxle. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.

. For all 6.0L 2500HD Seriesapplications, the proper level isfrom 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in)below the bottom of the fill plughole, located on the rear axle.Add only enough fluid to reachthe proper level.

. For all 6.6L Duramax Diesel2500HD Series applications andall 3500 Series applications, theproper level is from 17 mm to21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) belowthe bottom of the fill plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemNoise Emission Warranty

General Motors warrants to the firstperson who purchases this vehiclefor purposes other than resale andto each subsequent purchaser thatthis vehicle as manufactured byGeneral Motors was designed, builtand equipped to conform at the timeit left General Motors control with allapplicable U.S. EPA Noise ControlRegulations. This warranty coversthis vehicle as designed, built andequipped by General Motors and isnot limited to any particular part,component or system of the vehiclemanufactured by General Motors.Defects in design, assembly or anypart, component or system of thevehicle manufactured by GeneralMotors, which at the time it leftGeneral Motors control causednoise emissions to exceed Federalstandards, are covered by thewarranty for the life of the vehicle.

The following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lb). The noise controlsystem warranty is given in yourwarranty manual.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, priorto its sale or delivery to theultimate purchaser or while it isin use; or

2. The use of the vehicle aftersuch device or element ofdesign has been removed orrendered inoperative by anyperson.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.


Vehicle Care 281

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if the vehicle has one,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:

. Removal of fan clutch, if thevehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:

. Removal of the air cleanersilencer.

. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:

. Removal of the muffler and/orresonator.

. Removal of the exhaust pipesand exhaust pipe clamps.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.


282 Vehicle Care

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

roll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For properwindshield wiper blade length andtype, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 357.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.


Vehicle Care 283

2. Press the button (2) in themiddle of the wiper armconnector, and pull the wiperblade away from the armconnector (1).

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, contact your dealer.

For any bulb-changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.


284 Vehicle Care

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp

1. Cargo Lamp Bulbs2. Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) Bulb

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws and liftoff the lamp assembly.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

Replacement BulbsFor replacement bulbs, contact yourdealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the Instrument Panel FuseBlock. The same amperage fusecan also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.


Vehicle Care 285

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

The engine compartment fuse blockis in the engine compartment, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


286 Vehicle Care

MicroJ-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Trailer Brake

2 Trailer Battery

J-CaseFuses

Usage

3 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

4 Instrument PanelBEC 1

5 Spare

6 4WD Trec

7 Spare

8 Instrument PanelBEC 2

9 Spare

10 Rear WindowDefogger

11 Starter

12 Cooling Fan 1

13 Cooling Fan 2


Vehicle Care 287

Mini Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

14 Trailer Stop/TurnLamps, Left

15 Trailer ParkingLamps

16 TrailerBack-up Lamp

17 Trailer Stop/TurnLamps, Right

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

18 Fuel Pump

19 Integrated ChassisControl Module

20 ElectronicSuspensionControl Module

21 Fuel Pump PowerModule

22 Upfitter Switch 1

23 Upfitter 2

24 Front Wiper

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

25 Antilock BrakeSystem Valves

26 Upfitter SW 2

27 Upfitter SW 3

28 Parking Lamps,Right

29 ParkingLamps, Left

30 Upfitter 3

31 Upfitter SW 4

32 Upfitter 4

33 Back-up Lamps

34 Engine ControlModule Ignition

35 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

36 Heated Mirrors

37 Upfitter 1

38 CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

39 MiscellaneousIgnition

40 TransmissionIgnition

41 Fuel Pump 2

42 Cooling Fan Clutch

43 Engine

44 Fuel InjectorsA, Odd

45 Fuel InjectorsB, Even

46 Oxygen Sensor B

47 Throttle Control

48 Horn

49 Fog Lamp

50 Oxygen Sensor A

51 Engine ControlModule

52 Interior Heater

53 Spare


288 Vehicle Care

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

54 Aeroshutter

55 Front Washer

Micro Fuses(3 Pin)

Usage

56 Air ConditioningCompressor/Battery RegulatedVoltage Control

57 Air ConditioningCompressorModule/Battery Pack

58 TransmissionControl Module/Engine ControlModule

59 Headlamps

MicroRelays

Usage

60 Fuel Pump

61 Upfitter 2

MicroRelays

Usage

62 Upfitter 3

63 Upfitter 4

64 Trailer ParkingLamps

65 Run/Crank

66 Upfitter 1

67 Fuel Pump 2

68 Air ConditioningControl

69 Starter

Mini Relays Usage

70 Rear WindowDefogger

71 Engine ControlModule

Solid StateRelay

Usage

72 Cooling Fan Clutch

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuseblock access door is on thepassenger side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 289


Number Usage

1 Accessory PowerOutlet 3

Number Usage


7 Body ControlModule 4


9 Rear SeatEntertainment

10 Cargo Lamp

15 Steering WheelControls

18 Radio

19 Spare

20 Sunroof

23 Airbag/Info

26 Export/Power TakeOff/SEO Battery 1

27 Obstacle Detection/USB Ports


32 SEO Battery 2


290 Vehicle Care

Number Usage

35 AC Inverter

36 Amplifier

37 Spare

39 Rear Sliding Window

42 Right Door WindowMotor

43 Front Blower

44 SEO



47 Passenger Seat

50 Retained AccessoryPower/Accessory

51 Rear SlidingWindow Open

52 Rear Sliding WindowClose

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 291


Number Usage


Number Usage

2 SEO RetainedAccessory Power

3 Universal GarageDoor Opener/InsideRearview Mirror



8 Driver WindowSwitch/Mirror Switch

9 Spare

10 Accessory PowerOutlet RetainedAccessory Power

11 Accessory PowerOutlet Battery

12 Accessory PowerOutlet 1/CigaretteLighter

13 Discrete Logic IgnitionSwitch

14 Switch Backlighting


292 Vehicle Care

Number Usage


19 Spare

20 Spare

22 Heater, Ventilation,and Air Conditioning/Auxiliary Heater,Ventilation and AirConditioning Ignition

23 Instrument ClusterIgnition/SensingDiagnostic ModuleIgnition

24 Spare

25 Data Link Connector/Driver Seat Module

26 Passive EntryPassive Start/Heater,Ventilation, and AirConditioning

27 Spare

28 Spare

Number Usage

29 Park Enable/Electrically AdjustablePedals

30 SEO

31 Accessory/Run Crank

32 Heated SteeringWheel

33 Spare

34 Instrument Cluster

36 Spare

37 Spare

40 Left Doors

41 Driver Power Seat

43 Left Front Heated/Vented Seats

44 Right Front Heated/Vented Seats

45 Spare

49 Retained AccessoryPower/Accessory

50 Run/Crank

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 293

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfaces

and weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 293.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealer


294 Vehicle Care

for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 310.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P275/55R20,P285/50R20, or P285/45R22size tires, they are classified aslow-profile tires.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terraintires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 168.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection0 306.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger and light truck tiresidewall.


Vehicle Care 295

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,

tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 312.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 300 and Vehicle Load Limits0 176.


296 Vehicle Care

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 325.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load :Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure 0 300 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 176.

(4) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the

U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(5) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(6) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.


Vehicle Care 297

(7) Single Tire MaximumLoad : Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 300 and Vehicle Load Limits0 176.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in

the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire : The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.


298 Vehicle Care

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck(LT-Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Load Range : Load Range.

(7) Service Description : Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 300.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the


Vehicle Care 299

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.


300 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 300 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 176.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 309.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 312.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 176.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.


Vehicle Care 301

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 176. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Neverload the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 325 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If the


302 Vehicle Care

inflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.This could cause a crash, and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicleto be driven at high speeds, makesure the tires are rated forhigh-speed operation, are inexcellent condition, and are set tothe correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

Vehicles with P275/55R20 or P285/50R20 size tires require inflationpressure adjustment when drivingthe vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tireinflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi)above the recommended cold tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed drivinghas ended. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176 and Tire Pressure 0 300.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


Vehicle Care 303

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 303.

See Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning light


304 Vehicle Care

located on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 123 and TireMessages 0 133.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 300.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 306, Tire Rotation 0 306, andTires 0 292.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 305

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 310.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,

passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Make sure the Tire Pressureinfo page option is turned on.The info pages on the DIC canbe turned on and off throughthe Settings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 123.


306 Vehicle Care

4. Use the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheelto scroll to the Tire Pressurescreen under the DICinfo page.

5. Press and hold the V (Set/Reset) button located in thecenter of the DIC controls.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 346.


Vehicle Care 307

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires 0 309 and WheelReplacement 0 313.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas single rear wheels.

Dual Tire Rotation

When the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheelbolt, or wheel nut is replaced,check the wheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving.For proper torque and wheel nuttightening information, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” underTire Changing 0 316.

The outer tire on a dual wheelsetup generally wears fasterthan the inner tire. Tires lastlonger and wear more evenly ifthey are rotated. See TireInspection 0 306 and TireRotation 0 306. Also seeMaintenance Schedule 0 346.

{ Warning

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tire Pressure 0 300, forinformation on proper tireinflation.


308 Vehicle Care

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas dual rear wheels (exceptpolished forged aluminumwheels).

Vehicles with polished forgedaluminum dual wheels havethree unique wheels; a front, arear outer and a rear inner.These wheels cannot be rotatedto another position, however,they can be rotated from left toright to the same position.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas polished forged aluminumdual rear wheels. The sparewheel can be used in anyposition in the event of a flat tire,and can be rotated with the rearinner wheels. After the flat tire isrepaired, if the spare is not onone of the inner rear positions, itmust be replaced by the correctwheel in the front or rear outerpositions.

When installing dual wheels,check that the vent holes in theinner and outer wheels on eachside are lined up.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 300 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 176.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 360.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the inner diameter ofthe wheel hub opening withwheel bearing grease after awheel change or tire rotation toprevent corrosion or rustbuild-up. Do not get grease onthe flat wheel mounting surfaceor on the wheel nuts or bolts.


Vehicle Care 309

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), if the vehiclehas one. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 303.

Check that the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedproperly. Push, pull, and then tryto rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing0 316.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection 0 306 and Tire Rotation0 306 for additional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.


310 Vehicle Care

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mud

and snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 294 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 306 for informationon proper tire rotation. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle(two for single rear wheels, fourfor dual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with a

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 311

Warning (Continued)

similar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the winter

tires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 302.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems

(Continued)


312 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

developed for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 310 andAccessories and Modifications0 252.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on


Vehicle Care 313

specified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which all

passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull to

the left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.


314 Vehicle Care

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced on a dualwheel setup, check the wheel nuttorque after 160, 1 600 and10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi)of driving. For proper torque, see“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications 0 360.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 315 formore information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.


Vehicle Care 315

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 150.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

(Continued)


316 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear– not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Crew Cab

1. Wheel Blocks2. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel

Blocks3. Tool Kit4. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit5. Jack6. Jack Knob


Vehicle Care 317

Regular Cab

1. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

2. Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit4. Tool Kit5. Jack6. Jack Knob

Double Cab

1. Wheel Blocks2. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit3. Tool Kit4. Jack5. Jack Knob

For regular cab models, theequipment you will need is behindthe passenger seat. For double andcrew cab models, the equipment ison the shelf behind the passengerside second row seat.

1. Turn the knob on the jackcounterclockwise to lower thejack head to release the jackfrom its holder.

2. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.

3. Turn the wing nut used toretain the storage bag andtools counterclockwise toremove it.

Use the jack handle extensions andthe wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

1. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

2. Tire/Wheel Retainer3. Hoist Cable4. Hoist Assembly


318 Vehicle Care

5. Hoist Shaft6. Jack Handle Extensions7. Wheel Wrench8. Spare Tire Lock (If

Equipped)9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole10. Hoist End of Extension Tool

1. Open the spare tire lock coveron the bumper and use theignition key to remove thespare tire lock (8). To removethe spare tire lock, insert theignition key turn and pullstraight out.

2. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)and the two jack handleextensions (6), as shown.

3. Insert the hoist end (openend) (10) of the extensionthrough the hole (9) in the rearbumper.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (10) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

5. Pull the spare tire out fromunder the vehicle.

6. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.

Tilt the retainer and pull itthrough the center of the wheelalong with the cable andspring.

7. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.


Vehicle Care 319

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures andinstructions to remove the flat tireand raise the vehicle.

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extension5. Wheel Wrench

The tools you will be using includethe jack (1), the wheel blocks (2),the jack handle (3), the jack handleextensions (4), and the wheelwrench (5).

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 315 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turningthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise.

If the vehicle has a center capwith wheel nut caps, the wheelnut caps are designed to staywith the center cap after theyare loosened. Remove theentire center cap.

If the wheel has a smoothcenter cap, place the chiselend of the wheel wrench in theslot on the wheel, and gentlypry it out.


320 Vehicle Care

3. Use the wheel wrench and turnit counterclockwise to loosenthe wheel nuts. Do not removethe wheel nuts yet.

Front Position – 1500 Models

4. If the flat tire is on the front ofthe vehicle (1500 models),position the jack under thebracket attached to thevehicle's frame, behind the flattire, as shown.

Front Position – All Other Models

If the flat tire is on the front ofthe vehicle (all other models),position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

Rear Position – 1500 Models

5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for1500 models position the jackunder the rear axle about 5 cm(2 in) inboard of the shockabsorber bracket.


Vehicle Care 321

Rear Position – All Other Models

For all other models, positionthe jack under the rear axlebetween the spring anchor andthe shock absorber bracket.

If a snow plow has been addedto the front of the vehicle, lowerthe snow plow fully beforeraising the vehicle.

Make sure that the jack head ispositioned so that the rear axleis resting securely between thegrooves that are on thejack head.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto fit under the wheel well.

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andtake off the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.


322 Vehicle Care

8. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

9. Install the spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel.

11. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ Warning

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace allstuds on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of loose

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

running wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 360 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.


Vehicle Care 323

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 360 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

13. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence, asshown, by turning the wheelwrench clockwise.

For vehicles with dual wheels, havea technician check the wheel nuttightness of all wheels with a torquewrench after the first 160, 1 600 and10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi).Repeat this service whenever youhave a tire removed or serviced.See Capacities and Specifications0 360.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall either thecenter cap, or bolt-on hub cap,depending on what the vehicle isequipped with. For center caps,place the cap on the wheel and tapit into place until it seats flush withthe wheel. The cap only goes onone way. Be sure to line up the tabon the center cap with theindentation on the wheel. Forbolt-on hub caps, align the plasticnut caps with the wheel nuts andthen tighten by hand. Then use thewheel wrench to tighten.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or withthe valve stem pointing up candamage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stempointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.


324 Vehicle Care

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare orroad tire and wheel assemblymust be installed on the tire hoistto use it.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

1. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

2. Tire/Wheel Retainer

3. Hoist Cable4. Hoist Assembly5. Hoist Shaft6. Jack Handle Extensions7. Wheel Wrench8. Spare Tire Lock (If

Equipped)9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole10. Hoist End of Extension Tool

1. Put the tire on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, andto the rear.

2. Pull the cable and springthrough the center of thewheel. Tilt the wheel retainerplate down and through thecenter wheel.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Attach the wheel wrench (7)and extensions (6) together, asshown.

4. Insert the hoist end (10)through the hole (9) in the rearbumper and onto the hoistshaft.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.


Vehicle Care 325

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer isseated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and thentry to turn the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrenchto tighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock,if the vehicle has one.

To store the jack and jack tools:

1. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

2. Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit4. Wheel Wrench and

Extensions5. Tool Bag6. Jack Mounting Bracket7. Jack8. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks

1. Put the tools (4) in the toolbag (5) and place them in theretaining bracket (3).

2. Tighten down the wing nut (3).

3. Assemble the wheel blocks (2)and jack (7) together with thewing nut (1) and retainingbolt (8).

4. Position the jack (7) in themounting bracket (6). Positionthe holes in the base of thejack (7) onto the pin in themounting bracket (6).

5. Return them to their originallocation in the vehicle. See“Removing the Spare Tire andTools.”

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure 0 300and Vehicle Load Limits 0 176. Forinstructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 316.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 294. This spare tireshould not be driven on over


326 Vehicle Care

112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure. Repairand replace the road tire as soon asit is convenient, and stow the sparetire for future use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive infour-wheel drive until the flat tireis repaired and/or replaced. Thevehicle could be damaged andthe repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when a differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If the vehicle has

four-wheel drive and a different sizespare tire is installed, drive only intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If the vehicle has aspare tire that does not match theoriginal road tires and wheels in sizeand type, do not include the spare inthe tire rotation.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 277.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to cause

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 327

Warning (Continued)

cancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 252.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. If you have a vehicle with adiesel engine with twobatteries, you should knowbefore you begin that,especially in cold weather, you

may not be able to get enoughpower from a single battery inanother vehicle to start yourdiesel engine. If your vehiclehas more than one battery,using the battery that is closerto the starter will reduceelectrical resistance. This islocated on the passenger side,in the rear of the enginecompartment.

3. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause anunwanted ground connection.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake. If you have a


328 Vehicle Care

four-wheel-drive vehicle, besure the transfer case is in adrive gear, not in N (Neutral).

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal isunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. Touncover the positive (+)terminal, open the red plasticcover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals, seeEngine Compartment Overview0 255.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurt

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.


Vehicle Care 329

6. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

5.3L Shown, 6.0L, 6.2L, and 6.6LSimilar

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the vehicle with thedead battery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−)terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable.

5.3L and 6.2L

‐ To the metal bracket that isbolted to the engine andsupports the resonator, onthe vehicle with the deadbattery.


330 Vehicle Care

6.0L

‐ To the generator bracket, onthe vehicle with the deadbattery.

6.6L

‐ To the negative (−) post onthe auxiliary battery, on thevehicle with the dead battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.


Vehicle Care 331

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components. Use theproper straps around the tires tosecure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are

dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground. Dollytowing is towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s instructions. Seeyour dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.


332 Vehicle Care

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two-speed transfercase that have an N (Neutral) and aFour-Wheel Drive Low (4 (n) setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or others couldbe injured. Set the parking brakebefore shifting the transfer caseto N (Neutral).

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle beingtowed behind the tow vehicle,facing forward and on a levelsurface.

2. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 200. Check that thevehicle is in N (Neutral) byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. Shift the transmission into D(Drive). Turn the engine off.Then shift the transmission intoP (Park).

6. Wait for at least 10 seconds,then restart the engine.

7. Shift the transmission to D(Drive), then turn the engine offagain.

Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damageto the vehicle.

8. Disconnect the negativebattery cable at the battery andsecure the nut and bolt. Coverthe negative battery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

9. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

10. Move the steering wheel tomake sure the steering columnis unlocked.


Vehicle Care 333

11. With a foot on the brake pedal,release the parking brake.Keep the ignition key in thetowed vehicle in ACC/ACCESSORY to prevent thesteering column from locking.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Set the parking brake, thenshift the transmission toP (Park), and move the ignitionkey to OFF.

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.

5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off. Shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to Two-Wheel Drive High. See“Shifting out of N (Neutral)”under Four-Wheel Drive 0 200.See your dealer if the transfercase cannot be shifted out ofN (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is inTwo-Wheel Drive High byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park) and turn off theignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.


10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperaturedisplay will default to 0 °C(32 °F) but will reset withnormal usage.

Dolly Towing

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Two-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on theground.


334 Vehicle Care

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with the rear wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two-wheel-drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” later in this section.

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Four-Wheel-DriveVehicles

To dolly tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle from the front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Set the parking brake.

{ Warning


5. Use a clamping devicedesigned for towing to ensurethat the front wheels are lockedinto the straight position.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 200 for the properprocedure.

8. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towvehicle.


Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

To dolly tow a two-wheel-drivevehicle from the rear:


Vehicle Care 335

1. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.


3. Put the transmission inP (Park).




Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

{ Warning


To dolly tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle from the rear:

1. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.


3. Put the transmission inP (Park).



6. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under Four-WheelDrive 0 200 for the properprocedure.


Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)


336 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

This symbole is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be powerwashed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow with the car washinstructions. The windshield wiperand rear window wiper, if equipped,must be off. Remove anyaccessories that may be damagedor interfere with the car washequipment.

See Power Assist Steps 0 34 forcleaning information.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, tree

sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 337

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Spray-In Bedliner Care

A spray-in bedliner is a permanentcoating that bonds to the truck bedand cannot be removed. Promptlyrinse the bedliner surface followinga chemical spill to avoid permanentdamage.

Spray-in bedliners can fade fromoxidation, road dirt, heavy-dutyhauling, and hard water stains.Clean it periodically by washing offthe loose dirt and using a milddetergent. To restore the originalappearance, apply the bedlinerconditioner available through yourdealer.

Caution

Using silicone-based productsmay damage the bedliner, reducethe slip-resistant texture, andattract dirt.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.


338 Vehicle Care

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Hot, dry climates may

require more frequent application.Black marks from rubber material onpainted surfaces can be removed byrubbing with a clean cloth. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.


Vehicle Care 339

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

brushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, mastercylinder, brake fluid reservoir,vacuum pipes, electric vacuumpump including bracket and venthose, if equipped.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

1500 Series vehicles, at least everyother oil change lubricate the outertie rod ends.

2500/3500 Series vehicles, at leastevery other engine oil changelubricate the upper and lowercontrol arm ball joints. Control armball joints on 1500 series vehiclesare maintenance-free.

2500/3500 Series vehicles equippedwith steering linkage, at least everyother engine oil change lubricate thetie rod ball joints, idler arm pivotshaft bearings, idler arm socket, andpitman arm socket.

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.


340 Vehicle Care

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. Refer to “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applycleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow to all safety instructions onthe label. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.


Vehicle Care 341

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.


342 Vehicle Care

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaningcloth to a clean area frequentlyto prevent forcing the soil in tothe fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 343

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


344 Vehicle Care

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the driver sidefloor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 345

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 345

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 346

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 358

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see"Maintenance Schedule" in theDuramax diesel supplement.

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps to


346 Service and Maintenance

keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.

Normal Service

All maintenance services, includingthose listed under AdditionalRequired Services, are forvehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 223.

Severe Service

In addition to the normal serviceschedule, some vehicles requireservice more often. Severe serviceis for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high-speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 253.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 258.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 300.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 306.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 274.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once



a year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 261.

Passenger Compartment AirFilter

The passenger compartment airfilter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.Inspect the passenger compartmentair filter every 36 000 km/22,500 miles or two years,whichever comes first. Replace ifnecessary. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 306.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 258 and Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 261.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant 0 267.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 274.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 335. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 282.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 300.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 306.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 265.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 335.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wearat least once a year. SeeExterior Care 0 335. Lubricatethe suspension and steeringcomponents at least every otheroil change. (If equipped withgrease fittings)

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 60.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.



. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 335.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 281.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 281.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 282.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 282.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 45.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing0 316.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

For GVW under 8600 lbs, change transfer casefluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @

For GVW over 8600 lbs, change transfer casefluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavy

traffic, poor air quality, areas withhigh dust levels or are sensitive toenvironmental allergens. Filterreplacement may also be needed ifyou notice reduced airflow, windowsfogging up, or odors. Your local GM

Service location can help youdetermine when it is the right time toreplace your filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.



(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the transfer case fluid.Contaminated fluid will decrease thelife of the transfer case and/or axlesand should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 266.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 275.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

For GVW under 8600 lbs, change transfer casefluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @

For GVW over 8600 lbs, change transfer casefluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @ @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if the

vehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, poor air quality, areas withhigh dust levels or are sensitive toenvironmental allergens. Filterreplacement may also be needed ifyou notice reduced airflow, windowsfogging up, or odors. Your local GM

Service location can help youdetermine when it is the right time toreplace your filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.



(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the transfer case fluid.Contaminated fluid will decrease thelife of the transfer case and/or axlesand should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 266.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 275.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 335.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs



of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. For

information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 340 andExterior Care 0 335.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or anAllison Transmission, see the recommended fluids and lubricants section in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. AC Delco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See Engine Oil0 258.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® coolant.See Engine Coolant 0 267.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(2500/3500 Series Only)

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 19329450, in Canada 19329451).

Automatic Transmission (All except6.2L with 8-Speed transmission)

DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (6.2L with8-Speed transmission)

DEXRON®-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19300536, inCanada 19300537).

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Axle – Four-Wheel Drive SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle (1500 Series) SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Rear Axle (2500/3500 Series) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Front Axle Driveshaft Splines (All1500/2500/3500 Series) and RearAxle Driveshaft Splines (All 1500

Series)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, inCanada 19257122).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges,Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate

Hinge and Linkage, Fuel Door Hinge,Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges,

Latch Bolt, and Linkage

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Oil Filter

5.3L V8 89017525 PF63

6.0L V8 19303975 PF48E

6.2L V8 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22808781 CF188

Spark Plugs

5.3L V8 12622441 41-114

6.0L V8 12621258 41-110

6.2L V8 12622441 41-114

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754397 –

Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754397 –



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 359

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 362

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 360 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


360 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 355.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

5.3L V8 15.7 L 16.6 qt

6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt

6.2L V8 15.7 L 16.6 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

5.3L V8 7.6 L 8.0 qt

6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt

6.2L V8 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

1500 Series 98.4 L 26.0 gal


Technical Data 361

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

5.3L V8 (L83) C 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 (L96) G 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.2L V8 (L86) J 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)


362 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines

6.0L V8 Engines



Customer Information 363

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 365

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 366GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 370Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 375OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 376

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


364 Customer Information

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Limited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment



available at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information) :Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information) :View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I (Service History) : View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation) : Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

r (Warranty TrackingInformation) : Track your vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information) : Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 359.

H (Other Account Information) :View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information (if equipped).

F (Live Chat Support) : Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Owner Centre (Canada)gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC OwnerCentre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Use the Vehicle Tools section.

. Access third party enthusiastsites and social media networks.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program



This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number.

. Telephone number of yourlocation.

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.



. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 805 km (500mi).

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

. Legal fines.

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.



Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle



Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not

specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 367.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number.

. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.



If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 66.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehicle

repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information(U.S. and Canada Only)

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310,ICES‐001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the



OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 381.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


OnStar 377

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription and data plan. OnStarrequires the vehicle battery andelectrical system, cellular service,and GPS satellite signals to beavailable and operating. OnStar actsas a link to existing emergencyservice providers. OnStar maycollect information about you andyour vehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Terms &

Conditions and Privacy Statementfor more details including systemlimitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.


378 OnStar

. Obtain the Wi-Fi® hotspot nameor SSID and password,if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive, OnStar subscription plan(excludes Basic Plan). WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.


OnStar 379

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Destination Download

Subscribers can have directionssent to the vehicle’s navigationscreen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar Wi-Fi® Hotspot (IfEquipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press=, wait forthe prompt, then say “Wi-Fisettings.” On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi Settings on thescreen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type


380 OnStar

(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple® iOS,Android™, BlackBerry®,or Windows® mobile devices.OnStar Subscribers can access thefollowing services from a mobiledevice:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send directions to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

For OnStar RemoteLink informationand compatibility, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can provide specialoffers from restaurants and retailerson your route, help locate hotels,or book a room.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling servicewhich requires available minutes.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number



OnStar 381

2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsAdvanced Diagnostics provides astatus of the vehicle’s key systemswith a monthly e-mail, or bypressingQ. Real-time DiagnosticAlerts can be sent by email ortext.The Proactive Alerts feature (ifavailable) can help predict and alertof potential upcoming maintenanceissues with select components onthe vehicle, before they become aproblem.

OnStar can also monitor and reporttire pressure, if vehicle is equippedwith a Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.


382 OnStar

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance,Advanced Diagnostics, RemoteServices, Roadside Assistance,Turn-by-Turn Navigation, andHands-Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles. For moreinformation, a full description ofOnStar services, system limitations,and OnStar terms and conditions:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.

See Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpSubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.


OnStar 383

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five dayswithout an ignition cycle. If the

vehicle has not been started forfive days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


384 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 247. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacy

statement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/us/en/support/getdocuments.html

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the


OnStar 385

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a


386 OnStar

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use of

the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


Index 387

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Active Fuel Management® . . . . . . 192Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 247Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 265Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Passenger Sensing System . . . .67What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .63AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Passenger Status Indicator . . . .113Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 206Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218


388 Index

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 215

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Transmission Fluid . . . . . . 261, 264

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

AuxiliaryRoof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 151

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

BBatteryLoad Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Battery - North America . . . .277, 326Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 282Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Brake (cont'd)System Warning Light . . . . . . . . .116

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 184Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 224

California (cont'd)Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .252, 277, 326

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 3Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . 95Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 114CheckIgnition Transmission Lock . . . 282


Index 389

Check (cont'd)Malfunction IndicatorEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .75Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 370CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Traction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Control LightHill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Engine Temperature Gauge . . .110Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 365Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 372

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 370Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 3Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 375Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 362Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 214Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 218Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165


390 Index

Driving (cont'd)For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .24Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 173If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 175Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 167Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 176Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 290

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Engine (cont'd)Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 255Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Cooling System Messages . . . 128Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 109Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 193Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 375

Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 146Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 148

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 150Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . 96Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 264

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274


Index 391

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . .200, 277Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . 117Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . .52

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 121Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . 192Requirements, California . . . . . 224System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Fuses (cont'd)Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 290

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 142Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 109Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Transmission Temperature . . . . .111Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 345Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 150Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 121High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 148Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 122

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 121High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 302Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 173Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 210Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . . . 118


392 Index

Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 208Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 42Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . 129Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .28

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 294LampsAuxiliary RoofMounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 149Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . .115Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 221Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 118Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283LightHill Decent Control . . . . . . . . . . . .118

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 152LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . .116Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . . 120

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 120Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149


Index 393

Lights (cont'd)Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 148Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . .118Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . .112Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . .119

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 121Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 346Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 115Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . 128Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Messages (cont'd)Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Object Detection System . . . . . 130Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . 130Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 42


394 Index

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 184Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 280

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 261Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . 109Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 73Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 366OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 379

OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 381OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . 378OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Operating ModeOverheated EngineProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 372

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode . . . . 272

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 282

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 192Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 215

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 67Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 252

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 189Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . 59PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 374

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 369

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .252, 277, 326


Index 395

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 373Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 331Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 30ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 73

Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 374General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 362Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .60Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .59

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 374General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 369SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Heated and Ventilated Front . . . .52Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .49Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .49Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 87, 89


396 Index

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 253Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 358Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 359Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 369ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Special Application Services . . . . 352Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 30Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 281Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Steering System Messages . . . . . 132StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 94

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 376Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 365Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 37Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311


Index 397

Tires (cont'd)Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Pressure Monitor Operation . . 303Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 302Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Terminology and Definitions . . 298Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 313When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 118TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 228Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237General Information . . . . . . . . . . 228Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 331

Towing (cont'd)Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 246Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 246Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . 261, 264Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .111

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 312Universal Remote System . . . . . . 142Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Identification Number (VIN) . . . 359Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . 135Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 118Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111


398 Index

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . .116Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 220

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 313Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 79Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 282Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

denali owner's manual - owner center home€¦ · · 2018-03-282 introduction introduction...

Documents